PG Music Band in a Box - 2012 (Macintosh), Band in a Box 2012 Macintosh User guide

PG Music Band in a Box - 2012 (Macintosh), Band in a Box 2012 Macintosh User guide
®
Version 12 for Macintosh OS X
®
 Copyright 1989-2004 PG Music Inc. All rights reserved.
PG Music Inc. License Agreement
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE COMPLETING
THE INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE. USAGE OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES
YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
LICENSE
A.
The program may only be used on a single machine.
B.
You may transfer the program and license to another party if the other party agrees to
accept the terms of this Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must either transfer
all copies, whether in printed or machine readable form, to the same party, or, destroy all
copies not transferred. This includes all modifications and/or portions of the program
merged into other programs.
C.
You may receive the program in more than one media. Regardless of the type or size of
media you receive, you may install or use the media on a single machine.
The program (including any images, “applets,” photographs, animations, video, audio, music, and
text incorporated into the program) is owned by PG Music Inc. or its suppliers, and is protected by
international copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
You may not use, copy, or transfer the program, or any copy, modification or merged portion of the
program, in whole or in part, except as expressly provided for in this license. If you transfer
possession of any copy, modification or merged portion of the program to another party, your license
is automatically terminated.
LIMITATION OF REMEDIES
PG Music Inc.'s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
A.
The replacement of any media not meeting PG Music Inc.'s “Limited Warranty,” which
are returned to PG Music Inc., or an authorized PG Music Inc. dealer, with a copy of your
receipt.
B.
If PG Music Inc. or the authorized dealer is unable to deliver replacement media that is
free of defects in materials or workmanship, you may terminate this agreement, and your
money will be refunded.
In no event will PG Music Inc. be liable to you for any damages, including but not limited to lost
profits, lost savings, or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or the
inability to use such program, even if PG Music Inc. or an authorized PG Music Inc. dealer has been
advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party.
TRADEMARKS
Band-in-a-Box®, PG Music®, and PowerTracks Pro® are the registered trademarks of PG Music
Inc. in the United States, Canada, and other countries. Microsoft® and Windows® are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Apple®, the Apple logo, iMac®, Macintosh®, Mac®, Panther™, Power Mac®,
QuickTime® and True Type® are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders and should be noted as such.
PATENTS
Band-in-a-Box is protected under US Patent 5990407.
Printed in Canada
2
PG Music Inc. License Agreement
Table of Contents
PG Music Inc. License Agreement
2
Chapter 1: Introduction
6
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
8
Step 1 – Typing in the Chords ............................................................... 8
Step 2 – Choosing a Style .................................................................... 11
Step 3 – Play your song! ...................................................................... 12
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
14
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
25
Loading and Playing Songs ................................................................. 25
View and Print Notation ...................................................................... 29
Play the Jukebox .................................................................................. 31
Automatic Songs - “The Melodist”...................................................... 32
Make Your Own Songs........................................................................ 34
Have Fun! ............................................................................................ 39
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
40
Overview of the Main Screen .............................................................. 40
Synth Window / Piano Keyboard ........................................................ 42
Tool Bar............................................................................................... 45
Title Window....................................................................................... 46
Chordsheet Area .................................................................................. 48
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
50
Song Settings ....................................................................................... 50
The Chordsheet.................................................................................... 55
Table of Contents
3
Chord Preview/Builder .........................................................................66
MIDI file “Chord Wizard” ...................................................................68
Applying Styles ....................................................................................70
Playing, Pausing, and Stopping Songs .................................................72
Changing Volume, Panning, Reverb, Chorus, Bank ............................74
Saving Songs ........................................................................................74
Other Edit Functions.............................................................................76
More Preferences – Preferences 2 ........................................................81
MIDI Setup...........................................................................................85
The JukeBox.........................................................................................90
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
93
Notation ................................................................................................93
Printing ...............................................................................................104
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
107
Automatic Songs - “The Melodist” ....................................................107
Automatic Solo Generation – “The Soloist” ......................................115
Automatic Guitar Chord Solos – “The Guitarist”...............................120
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
125
Real Time Recording..........................................................................125
Step Edit Notes...................................................................................127
Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window ............................128
Recording with the Wizard Feature....................................................128
Importing Pre-Recorded MIDI Data...................................................129
Record using The Melodist ................................................................130
Additional Options for Melody/Soloist Track ....................................131
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
139
Animated Drum Kit............................................................................139
Drum Kit Main Window ....................................................................142
4
Table of Contents
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
144
The StyleMaker............................................................................... 144
The Harmony Maker.......................................................................... 167
The Soloist Maker.............................................................................. 173
The Melodist Maker .......................................................................... 176
The Guitarist Maker........................................................................... 181
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
186
MIDI File Chord Wizard ................................................................... 186
The Guitarist ...................................................................................... 194
Guitar Tutor ....................................................................................... 198
Chord Substitution Wizard ................................................................ 201
Chord Builder .................................................................................... 205
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
206
CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X Tutorial......................................... 206
Chapter 14: Reference
213
Band-in-a-Box Menu Descriptions .................................................... 213
Song Menu......................................................................................... 226
GS Menu............................................................................................ 249
Keystroke Commands – “Hot Keys” ................................................. 254
PG Music Inc.
258
Index
259
Registration Form
267
How to Register ................................................................................. 267
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
The latest version of Band-in-a-Box for Macintosh is
built for OS X, and adds many new features! This
exciting new version of Band-in-a-Box for Macintosh
runs “Native” in OS X Jaguar or Panther (version
10.2 or higher recommended) and includes many new
and enhanced features.
Band-in-a-Box version 12 is fully Mac OS X carbonized. We have a huge
number of new and improved Styles, Soloist, Harmonies, and Song Demos,
making your Band-in-a-Box program sound better than ever! Program
operations are much faster, including up to 3 times faster notation redraws, song,
and soloing generation. Playback timing is improved and rock-solid with Mac
OS X. You can export your Band-in-a-Box files and import them into Apple’s
GarageBand program for further processing. And we include a great
QuickTime video tutorial, showing you all the newest features in version 12!
The styles have been greatly enhanced – we’ve edited the existing styles, and
made many more styles using the newest features. This automatically makes
your existing songs sound better! New Soloists, Melodists and Harmonies are
now included, making this the best-sounding Band-in-a-Box ever!
The user interface has been enhanced with improved menus, and other
enhancements, giving Band-in-a-Box a much better look in the OS X
environment. Improved OS X 128X128 “high resolution” program and file
icons are also included with this upgrade to enhance the user experience.
Timing has been improved to microsecond accuracy for tighter playback.
MIDI support for Band-in-a-Box 12 for Macintosh now includes CoreMIDI
(for support of external MIDI devices) as well as improved support for
QuickTime Music synthesizers, making it work and sound much better in OS
X. Additional MIDI driver enhancements allow users with controller keyboards
such as the M-Audio Oxygen 8, or the Edirol PCR-1 to play thru the QuickTime
Music synthesizer from their MIDI keyboard.
Other enhanced features include: odd-time signature support (7/8, 11/8 etc.),
maximum number of Soloists increased from 256 to 1024, count-in types now
include choice of drum pattern or regular count-in, addition of “low root
harmony” setting to Harmony Edit dialog, “Strauss-in-a-Box” to automatically
transform any 4/4 song to a Waltz 3/4 feel, “De-Strauss” to transform any song
with a 3/4 time signature to a 4/4 feel, StylePicker Dialog enhancements, bass
player plays better “5ths” over some Jazz chords, support for audio and video
memos for songs , options to set the note density in the Soloist and much
more.
6
Chapter 1: Introduction
And much more …
People familiar with the previous versions of Band-in-a-Box will be pleased to
know that we have kept the same functionality of our previous releases. The
new features are optional and don't interfere with familiar methods of using the
program. All songs, styles etc. are completely compatible with previous
versions, so that you can upgrade without losing any of your existing work.
Chapter 1: Introduction
7
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
Creating music with Band-in-a-Box is as easy as 1-2-3! In this tutorial, you’ll
see just how easy it is to get Band-in-a-Box making music for you.
Step 1 – Typing in the Chords
There are numerous ways of entering chords into Band-in-a-Box. We’ll discuss
five fast ways of entering chords:
1.
Using the Computer Keyboard
2.
Playing directly on a MIDI Controller Keyboard
3.
Using the Chord Builder
4.
Importing Chords from a MIDI file
5.
Loading an Existing Band-in-a-Box Format Song
On the main screen of the program, you’ll see an area called the chordsheet.
Band-in-a-Box main screen showing chordsheet.
Each of the numbered cells on the chordsheet represents a bar. In this example,
you can see that there is an F6 chord in the first bar of this song. Similarly, one
row down, you can see an F6 chord in bar 5, and later in the song, a G7 in bar 7.
8
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
Notice the box in the first half of bar 1. This is the highlight cell, and it
represents the bar you are currently working on. You can move the highlight
cell around using the cursor keys, or select a specific bar using the mouse.
Enter Chords Using the Computer Keyboard
To enter a specific chord, move the highlight cell to where you want to place the
chord. For example, if you wanted to add (or change) a chord in bar 20, you
would highlight bar 20 on the chordsheet. Next, type in your chords. If you
want an F7 at bar 2, type F and 7 on your keyboard and press return. Notice
that when you use the return key, the highlight cell moves to the second half of
the bar. You could then enter another chord at beat 3. Chords are commonly
typed using standard chord symbols (like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13#9/E), but
you can enter them in any of the supported chord symbol display formats like
Roman Numerals, Nashville Notation, and Solfeggio.
Enter Chords Using a MIDI Controller Keyboard
If you have a MIDI controller keyboard, you can use it to enter chords into
Band-in-a-Box. First, you must make sure that your cables are properly
connected and you have the correct input drivers selected.
If you play a chord on your MIDI keyboard, and then press Ctrl+Return, the
chord will be entered into the chordsheet at the current highlight cell position.
Enter Chords Using the Chord Builder
Press the Chord Builder button. This opens the Chord Builder dialog
with a list of chord roots and their extensions.
Chord Builder Dialog
To enter a chord at the current bar, select the chord root from the left pane, and
then the extension on the right pane. Pressing [Enter Chord ___] enters the
chord and advances the highlight cell to the next half bar.
Import Chords from a MIDI File
You can have Band-in-a-Box import chords from an existing MIDI file. Choose
File | Import Chords from MIDI File on the File menu, or use the keystrokes
Ctrl+Option+I, to open the Chord Wizard dialog.
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
9
Chord Wizard Dialog
When the Chord Wizard dialog opens, press the [Open (Change)…] button to
choose the MIDI file that you want Band-in-a-Box to interpret the chords from.
To help Band-in-a-Box interpret the chords better, you can choose a preset for
the song. Choose from among such genres as Pop, Rock, or Jazz Standard.
Loading an existing Band-in-a-Box format song
Press the [song] button. The first time you use this button, Bandin-a-Box will offer to build a song list for you. We’ve included many demo
songs for you to use, and they are listed in the song list.
You could also load a pre-existing song by using the File | Open song… menu
item, or by pressing the F3 function key, which will launch the familiar
Macintosh file dialog. Note that most songs will automatically load a “Style,”
which we’ll learn about in the next section.
Going to the next step …
Now that you have chords on your chordsheet, you are ready to move on to step
number two.
10
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
Step 2 – Choosing a Style
Band-in-a-Box creates backing arrangements based on the chords you type in,
applied to a particular Style.
What’s a Style?
A style is a set of rules that determine how Band-in-a-Box creates music using
your chords. By adjusting the rules, we have created hundreds of styles that are
appropriate for everything from Country to Bebop. Some style examples would
be Jazz Swing, Blues Shuffle, Hip Hop, Country 4/4, Pop Ballad, Waltz and
Medium Rock to name just a few. If you don’t find a pre-made style that suits
your tastes, create one from scratch using the StyleMaker. Making custom
styles with the StyleMaker is explained in detail in the full documentation.
Four Fast ways to Open a Style
Method 1: From Disk
To open a user style from disk, you can just type the F9 key. You will be
presented with the familiar Macintosh file dialog from which you can select a
specific style from the Styles folder.
Method 2: The StylePicker
You can use the StylePicker window to select your style.
Select the [Style] button above the chordsheet, or type
Ctrl+F9 on your computer keyboard.
The StylePicker
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
11
Selecting a Style using the StylePicker.
This window shows styles listed by Styles Set number, and by genre. Select a
Set or genre from the left pane, and choose the specific style on the right pane.
There are memos and examples for each of the styles. Styles with a similar feel
and tempo range to the current selection (prototype) are marked with an (*)
asterisk. These styles are possible substitutes for the prototype. Styles marked
with a (^) caret symbol are similar in feel but have a different tempo range. The
style of your song can be changed at any bar by pressing the F5 key to launch
the Edit Bar Settings dialog.
Method 3: Favorites
Styles that you’ve used previously show up in the Favorite Styles dialog.
Choose this from the menu User | Load Favorite Styles… or type Shift+F9 on
your computer keyboard, or click on the [f] button to the left of the [.STY]
StylePicker button. You can choose to save a Favorites set for use later. You
can also load a set of favorite styles this way.
Method 4: Quick Pick
You can choose from among the
24 “built-in” styles. This list
provides a quick way to choose
from among the most popular
music genres.
Step 3 – Play your song!
We’ve entered chords on the chordsheet and chosen a style. Now it’s time to
play the song! First we need to tell Band-in-a-Box how long our song is, how
12
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
many times we want the program to play through the chords, in what key and
how fast.
Framing the Song
To tell Band-in-a-Box where the start and end of the song is, we look at the
middle of the Band-in-a-Box main screen.
Locate the framing settings, there are three of them. The numbers (1 -32) in
brackets are the bar numbers for the beginning and the end of the Chorus. The
number 3 to the right of the brackets is the number of times the Chorus repeats.
In the example above, the Chorus starts at bar 1, ends on bar 32, and is going to
play 3 times. You can change these settings to play more choruses, or make the
Chorus start later, for example in the case where you want an intro to play.
Setting the Key
In the example above, the key is set to C. However, you can set this to any key.
In our first view of the chordsheet, the blues song was in the key of F. If you do
change the key, Band-in-a-Box will offer to transpose the chordsheet for you.
This is especially useful when loading in new songs and transposing them to
other keys. If you’ve entered a progression that you intend for a particular key,
and then choose the key afterward, you should say no when asked to transpose
the chordsheet.
Setting the Tempo
If you know the tempo value of your song, you can enter it in the tempo box.
The song example above has a tempo of 120. There is an even faster way to
enter a tempo. Locate the minus key [-] and the equals key [=] in the number
row of your computer keyboard, they are usually next to each other. If you tap
the [-] key 4 times at your tempo, Band-in-a-Box will set the tempo
automatically for you. If you tap the [=] key four times, Band-in-a-Box will set
the tempo and begin song playback!
Press Play
When you’re ready, just press the [Play] button or the F4 function key and
Band-in-a-Box will immediately generate and play a professional arrangement
of your song using the settings and the style you selected.
Having more fun with Band-in-a-Box.
That’s all there is to quickly creating music with Band-in-a-Box. There are also
many powerful features and user settings for you to discover. Have fun making
music with Band-in-a-Box!
Chapter 2: QuickStart Tutorial
13
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
New Features in Band-in-a-Box Version 12 for Macintosh OS X…
All New 32-bit PPC Carbonized Engine.
Previous versions of Band-in-a-Box were 68K code, which required translation
by the processor to operate on newer Macs. The new program is rebuilt with a
32-bit-clean carbonized PPC engine, so that it runs natively in OS X. Program
operations are much faster, including up to 3 times faster notation redraws, song
and soloing generation. Playback timing is improved and rock-solid with Mac
OS X.
Odd-Time Signature Support.
Previous versions of Band-in-a-Box supported only X/4 time signatures, but
now we’ve added support for odd-time signatures like 9/8, 11/8, 13/16, 19/16,
etc. The count-in and the style plays in the odd-time signature feel, and you can
change time signatures during the song.
Note: The notation window still displays/edits these odd-time signatures in 4/4, but
the styles all play/sound correctly.
14
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
Example of odd-time signature support:
Load in a demo song like Songs: 11_8_Pop.MGU.
This loads in the “11/8 Pop” Style.
When you press Play, you’ll hear a count-in in 11/8 time.
The 11/8 time signature is stored within the style, so you can switch at any bar
to a 4/4 style, and the song will change time signatures easily. Also, if you
change from a 4/4 style to an 11/8 style, the Melody will still stay nicely in time
with the bars.
With the pro version we include 5/4, 7/8, 24/16, and 11/8 time signatures. There
are 20 more available on the “About Time” Styles disk #38. There is also an
“About Time Video” available that demonstrates using odd time signatures in
BB, and how to “count” in odd-time signature styles.
Maximum Number of Soloists increased
Maximum Number of Soloists increased to 1,024 (from 256), and new
Soloists added. The previous limit of soloists was 256, and we had already
defined 253 of them! We’ve now increased this limit to 1,024, and have added
new soloists. The default Soloist file for the OS X version of Band-in-a-Box is
now called Default_OS X.SOL. (the OS9 version is called DEFAULT.SOL)
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
15
New Count-In Options
“Count-in” can be Drum Patterns instead of “1-2-1234.” There is a new
option in Preferences to select count-in type. You can specify to have Band-ina-Box play 2 bars of a drum pattern instead of the count-in. You may prefer
hearing the drum beat to a simple count-in, since it provides more information
about the upcoming groove. If you’re playing with Band-in-a-Box live on a
“dance floor,” this setting is a great way to avoid “dead air” between songs, and
keep the drumbeat going. Includes options to have “a” or “b” drum fills or
patterns play for the 2 bars.
To set this, choose Prefs | CountIn, and set Lead-in Type to one of “b” substyle
fills/ “a” substyle fills/ or fill-pattern or pattern-pattern combinations.
Harmony – Low Root Feature.
The Harmony Edit dialog now has settings for “low root harmony” which adds a
voice that plays the root of the chord. This is useful for a cappella or baritone
sax harmonies, where the lowest voice is playing the bass roots. You can set the
low-high range. The root played will always be at least one octave from the
melody note (assuming it can still be inside the set low/high range). We include
many harmonies that are preset to use this low root harmony feature. They are
in the range starting at harmony #153.
The Harmony Edit dialog now has settings for “low root harmony” which adds a
voice that plays the root of the chord. This is useful for a cappella harmonies
where the lowest voice is playing the bass roots. You can set the low-high
range. The root played will always be at least one octave from the melody note
(assuming it can still be inside the set low-high range).
You can edit any harmony to add a low root harmony by pressing Edit Harmony
(on the Harmony selection dialog), and then selecting “Low Root” and then
inputting the range of acceptable notes for the low root voice, and a velocity
boost if applicable.
16
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
Strauss-in-a-Box
Transform 4/4 Melody to a Waltz 3 /4 (“Strauss-in-a-Box”).
You can now automatically transform any 4/4 song/melody to a Waltz 3/4 feel.
Simply load in any 4/4 song and change the style to a Waltz style. The program
will offer to transform the melody so that it works as a Waltz (or choose the
added menu item Melody-Edit-Utilities-Transform to 3/4). This function is
referred to as “Strauss” in honor of Johann Strauss – the famous Waltz
composer. It is fun and educational to hear and play familiar songs in a Waltz
feel. Band-in-a-Box uses intelligent algorithms to transform the melody to the
new time signature.
To use this feature, load in any song in 4/4 time. Then load in a Waltz style. If
there’s a Melody (or Soloist) present, you’ll be asked if it’s OK to change the
Melody from 4/4 to 3/4. If you click YES to that, the transformation will occur
and you can listen to the Melody in 3/4 time.
If you click NO to the offer to transform the Melody, you can still convert it
later by choosing Melody | Edit | Utilities | Transform 4/4 to 3/4. Note that if
you choose the manual command, the Melody prior to transformation should
have 8 beats before bar 1 beat 1 of the Melody begins (as it normally would in a
4/4 style)
Transform “Waltz” Melody to 4/4 (“De-Strauss” the Melody.)
If you have a song with a 3/4 time signature, you can now instantly hear it as a
4/4 feel. Simply load the Waltz song and then change the style to a 4/4 style.
Band-in-a-Box will prompt you to transform the melody to a 4/4 feel and will
then will change the melody. There’s also a dedicated menu item for this,
Melody-Edit-Utilities-Transform to 4/4. Band-in-a-Box uses intelligent
algorithms to transform the melody to the new time signature. (Note: If loading
from the StylePicker window, you need to have “Prompt w/preview” for the
prompt option to appear.)
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
17
To use this feature, load in any song in 3/4 time. Then load in a 4/4 style. If
there’s a Melody (or Soloist) present, you’ll be asked if it’s OK to change the
Melody from 3/4 to 4/4. If you click YES to that, the transformation will occur
and you can listen to the Melody in 4/4 time.
If you click NO to the offer to transform the Melody, you can still convert it
later by choosing Melody | Edit | Utilities | Transform 3/4 to 4/4. Note that if
you choose the manual command, the Melody prior to transformation should
have 6 beats before bar 1 beat 1 of the Melody begins (as it normally would in a
3/4 style)
Bass player plays better “5ths
Bass player plays better “5ths” over some Jazz chords. Band-in-a-Box’s
bass player was playing some natural 5ths over some chords like C7 altered or
others. Now, after a discussion with some bass players, we’ve improved Bandin-a-Box so that the bass part plays the #5 or b5 correctly on these Jazz chords.
Load Previous Style, Load Next Style.
This function, (analogous to the Load Next Song function) loads in the previous
(or next) style in alphabetical order of the file name. To load the next style, in
alphabetical order, choose the menu item File | File Utilities | Load Next Style,
or use the hot key Command+Shift+F8 (Control+Command+Shift+F8 for the
previous style).
“Chase Volumes” added for playback.
For files that include volume change events (Controller 7). Band-in-a-Box will
locate the most recent volume control information that is prior to the current
location in the song. Band-in-a-Box will then send this volume control
information at the start of playback.
18
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
Drum count-in options
Option to hear the drum count-in even if the drums are muted or disabled.
This is great for drummers who play along with Band-in-a-Box and mute the
drum track. Previously, when the drum track was muted or disabled in a song,
the count-in drum click wouldn't play. Now there's an option to play the drum
count-in in all circumstances. To set this option, choose Edit | Preferences and
set “Lead-in drum count if drums muted” to true (default is true).
StylePicker Enhancements.
There is a new filter to display only the styles of a certain styles set number,
as well as displaying the full descriptive name of the styles set. The limit of
number of styles has been increased (to 4,800) to accommodate the large
number of third party styles developed for Band-in-a-Box. The window size
has been increased, providing more space for the category descriptions. A
new “Show All” button removes any filter set.
There is a new filter to display only the styles of a certain Styles Set number, as
well as displaying the name of the Styles Set. To select this, open the
StylePicker, and choose “Only Show Styles Set #.” When you pick Styles Set #,
you can then see only that Styles Set listed, regardless of the category you are in.
The limit of number of styles in the StylePicker has been increased to 4,800 to
accommodate the large number of third party styles developed for Band-in-aBox. The window size has been increased, providing more space for the
category descriptions.
Technical note: The Styles list file is called BBM.LST for the OS X version and
BBW.LST for the OS9 and prior versions.
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
19
StylePicker Dialog “show all” button
StylePicker Dialog “show all” button added which removes any
filter set.
Mono/Stereo menu options
Mono/Stereo menu options are available to easily switch all parts to mono or
stereo. Also, if your current settings are mono, the program will offer to convert
to stereo when you exit the MIDI Driver selection dialog. On the GS Menu, see
the dedicated menu items to set to Mono or Stereo.
Video and Audio Memo support
You can add an audio (MP3) or video (QuickTime) memo to your Band-in-aBox song. These are prepared outside of the program, but can be associated with
the song by using a similar filename to the song (see technical note). Several of
PG Music’s new “101 Series” programs include these audio and video memos.
For example, there are video guitar memos that demonstrate “advanced Jazz
guitar comping” showing video examples corresponding to the MIDI guitar
examples in the Band-in-a-Box song.
When a song has an Audio memo, an “Audio Memo”
button appears on-screen below the “Memo” button.
When a song has a Video memo, a “Video Memo”
button appears on-screen below the “Memo” button.
Technical notes: To add an audio memo to a song called “My Song.MGU,” put
the memo as a MP3 in the same folder as the song, naming it My
Song_AudioMemo.MP3. To add a video memo to a song called “My Song.MGU,”
put the memo as a .MOV in the same folder as the song, naming it My
Song_VideoMemo_3.MP3.
Soloist “Note-Density” option.
Now you can control the maximum number of notes per quarter note that the
soloist will use. For example, you can set a “Rock Guitar” Soloist to use nothing
shorter than 16th notes. This will produce fewer “guitar hero” solos with bursts
of 32nd notes, etc. Or you could create a jazz solo that uses only quarter notes or
longer to help with your sight-reading or student study. We’ve already modified
many of the soloists using this new setting, so your solos will already sound
better without you having to change this setting.
20
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
For example, Soloist 188 is edited so that it will play at most 5 notes per beat.
Dedicated menu items added on GM Menu
Dedicated menu items added on GM Menu for “Turn Local On,” “Turn
Local Off,” and “When program quits, turn local on.”
“Local” refers to sounds generated by playing on an external MIDI keyboard, if
set to “off,” Band-in-a-Box will play the keyboard via the THRU part, if set to
ON, both Band-in-a-Box and the keyboard might be playing the same THRU
part.
The GS Menu has been re-designed, with many items added, and a separate
pull down menu added for the Master Volume Adjust options.
Note: Most of the items on these sub-menus have hotkeys, and it is easier to
access them quickly using the hotkeys.
New Hot Keys
These hotkeys are slightly different than previous versions, and are now the
same as the Windows version.
−
Ctrl+Shift+Q and Ctrl+Shift+W change the volume of the current part.
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
21
−
Ctrl+Shift and E/R change the Reverb,
−
Ctrl+Shift T/Y changes the Chorus,
−
Ctrl+Shift U/I changes the Pan,
−
Ctrl+Shift O/P changes the Bank.
Configuration Files
Band-in-a-Box stores its preferences files in the main Band-in-a-Box folder.
These are the configuration files for the OS X version. The names in brackets
are the names of the same files under OS9. It is possible to run the Band-in-aBox OS 9 version from the same folder as the OS X version, so the
configuration file names are slightly different. These configuration files have
different names in OS X than previous version of Band-in-a-Box.
•
Intrface_OS X.BBW (OS9 name was Intrface.BBW) This file stores
the many Band-in-a-Box program preferences
•
Band-in-a-Box Preferences_OS X (OS9 name was Band-in-a-Box
Preferences) This file stores the name and information of the currently
selected MIDI Driver (e.g. QuickTime or CoreMIDI)
•
BBM.LST (in OS9 was BBW.LST). This text file stores the styles list
for the StylePicker.
•
Default_OS X.SOL (OS9 name was Default.SOL) This stores the
Soloist names.
These configuration files have the same names in OS X as they did in previous
versions of Band-in-a-Box
•
Default.HAR, Default.GIT, Default.MEL (same names in OS9).
These store the Harmony, Guitar and Melodist names.
•
MySetup.DK (Same name in OS9) This file stores the drum kit, patch
map information.
•
DefaultM.Ali (Same name in OS9). This file stores the names of style
aliases used.
If you want to reset Band-in-a-Box to default settings, you can erase the 3 files
Intrface_OS X.BBW, Band-in-a-Box Preferences_OS X, and MySetup.DK.
It is easy to find these files, from the Finder, sort by date and they will likely be
the most recently written files to the Band-in-a-Box folder.
About Hot Key Names on the Menus
When hotkeys are listed on the menus, we now use the OS X-recommended
symbols. For example, the picture shown here is from the Finder menu.
22
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
This represents the command key.
The up arrow is for the Shift key.
This represents the Option Key.
^
The caret symbol represents the
Control key.
New Program Hints Added
Band-in-a-Box supports the OS X style hint tags (“yellow windows”) that
appear when you hold your mouse over a button, menu item, or dialog item. In
addition, if you hold the Command key down, a “Long hint” will appear with
additional information.
The hints are configurable inside Band-ina-Box, in the Edit | Prefs 2 dialog, there are
settings to control length of time before the
hint appears, whether you’d like long hints
to be the default display, and enabling of
hints overall and in the dialogs.
…and many more!
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
23
Let's check out Styles Set #38
Note: Styles Set #38: If you ordered Band-in-a-Box 12 as an upgrade, the
package includes Styles Set #38: About Time. (This is not one of the
styles disks that are included in the first time purchase unless you order
the MegaPAK.)
If you have the first time version of Band-in-a-Box and don't have a Bandin-a-Box Folder: #38 Style Demos folder, use the \BB\SOLODEMO
directory of Band-in-a-Box for this example.
To try out the new styles from Styles Set #38, press the OPEN button and load
in a song (e.g., from Band-in-a-Box Folder: #38 Style Demos).
Once you have a song loaded in, the directory will be set to the styles demo.
Then you can simply press the SONG button to see a full list of the songs.
Press the Jukebox button to hear all of the styles demonstrated, one after
another.
There are 20 new “About Time” styles in Styles Set #38.
11_8_EV.STY
11/8 even 8ths style
11_8_POP.STY
11/8 meter Pop style
13_8_POP.STY
13/8 meter Pop style
14_8_JAZ.STY
14/8 Jazz style
15_16POP.STY
15/16 meter Pop style
19_16_44.STY
19/16 meter & 16/16 meter style
2416VISH.STY
24/16 Vishnu - Jazz/Rock (Fusion) style
54_EVEN.STY
Even 5/4 meter style
54_FSTRK.STY
5/4 fast 60s style Rock style
54_SWING.STY
5/4 meter with Swing based 8th notes style
58_28_38.STY
Even 5/8 meter style
58_78POP.STY
5/8_7/8 Pop style
68_BOSSA.STY
6/8 Bossa style
68_JAZZ1.STY
6/8 meter (Swing 8) Jazz style
78_CTRY.STY
Country/Pop style in 7/8 meter style
78_POP.STY
Pop 7/8 meter style
78_ROCK.STY
7/8 Rock style
98_4_5.STY
9/8 meter style
98_JAZZ1.STY
Jazz Style in 9/8 meter
98_ROCK.STY
9/8 Rock style
24
Chapter 3: Summary of New Features
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
You can arrange, record, save, and print your own song ideas with Band-in-aBox. Just type in the chords to any song; choose a style and press [Play] to hear
the “band” play a full arrangement. Have some fun by changing to different
styles. For even more fun record a MIDI Melody – or have Band-in-a-Box write
a Melody for you. Add Harmony, an automatically improvised Soloist, an Intro,
and print out a lead sheet and play along.
Loading and Playing Songs
To play an existing Band-in-a-Box song here’s all you need to do:
Open any song file with the familiar file dialog.
Start song playback.
Stop song playback.
Pause the song with the [Hold] button; resume by pressing it again.
Jump to any bar in the song. Press the [From] button to choose
which chorus and bar number to jump to.
The [Song] button opens a list of all of the songs in the current
directory.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
25
The first time that you select the [Song] button Band-in-a-Box automatically
writes the song list. From then on, the song list opens when the [Song] button is
selected. Check “Play when selected” to automatically play the song selected.
For even more fun, play along with the band! Once you have selected a song,
you’ll see the chords in the chordsheet, so it’s easy to read and play along.
Play along with your MIDI Controller Keyboard
If you have an external MIDI keyboard controller connected to your computer
system, you can use the MIDI THRU features to play along with the program.
Harmonize your play along part by pressing the [T] button in the synth
window to choose a Thru harmony, just as you would for the Melody part.
Change the Style
The hundreds of musical styles available for Band-in-a-Box include lots of
variations for any style you choose. You can even use several styles in the same
song by pressing the F5 function key on the computer to open the “Edit Bar
Settings” dialog to change the style at any bar.
Try different styles by clicking on the [.STY] button to choose
from the StylePicker. Styles that are in a similar feel to the
prototype will be indicated with an (*) asterisk. These would be styles that have
the same feel (triplets/ eighth/ sixteenths) and a similar tempo range. Styles that
have a similar feel but a different tempo range are marked by a (^) caret symbol.
Choose the “Show Styles Filter” to display all styles, or only styles that match
the prototype partially or fully.
26
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Change the Sound
Band-in-a-Box has several instrument parts - Bass, Piano, Drums, Guitar, Solo,
Strings, Melody, and Thru. You can change patches on any part.
The easiest way to change patches on a part is to select the part by clicking on
the desired part to change.
Click on the Instrument Panel box. You will then see a menu of 128 instrument
names. This list is the General MIDI patch list. Scroll down the list to find the
patch that you want.
Or click on the numbered buttons below the Instrument Panel box to choose
from the 10 most common instruments chosen for that particular part.
If you have a General MIDI module, or any of the units that have a patch file for
higher banks (*.PAT file) listed for them, then press the '+' button on the main
screen to choose the .PAT file from the Synthkits folder.
This is an especially useful feature if you have a synthesizer or sound source that
has patches on higher banks beyond the basic 128 General MIDI instruments.
The window that appears when you click on this button looks like this:
This will provide you with a list of all the patches available to you by name on
the left, and where the patch is located (patch #, bank) on the right.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
27
Add a Melody
Band-in-a-Box is much more than an arranger and accompanist.
You can also record your live MIDI performance to the
Melody track, enter a Melody in the Notation note-by-note,
or use the Wizard to record from your computer keyboard.
Enable the Embellisher, and the Melody will be embellished
as it is played so that you hear a more lively and realistic
Melody - and it's different every time. The Embellisher is
only active while the music is playing; it doesn't permanently
affect the Melody track.
Harmonize the Melody
Press the [M] button in the
song title line to add a
harmony to the Melody track.
The Select Melody
Harmony dialog box allows
you to choose from any of the
pre-defined harmonies and
even allows you to define
your own.
Play along with the Wizard
The Wizard is an intelligent play along feature that is controlled
with the bottom two rows your computer’s QWERTY keyboard. The bottom
row of keys plays chord tones, the second row plays passing tones - you play
any key in either row and never make a mistake!
Add a Solo
That’s right! Band-in-a-Box can “solo like a pro” in over 200 styles.
Use the [Solo] button on the main screen to open the Select
Soloist dialog box and choose from over 200 Soloist profiles.
28
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Use the preset Soloist settings, or choose your own Solo Mode and the Choruses
where you want a solo. The Soloist Maker [Edit…] button gives access to the
advanced settings in the Soloist Editor where you can edit existing profiles or
create new Soloists of your own.
To see the Soloist part play in standard music notation open the
Notation window and press the [S] button at the far right of the
instrument buttons.
Notation window showing Soloist part.
View and Print Notation
Open the Notation window with the Notation button. You
will see standard notation on the grand staff.
Standard Notation Window
Click on the instrument buttons to see the notation for
the different parts, the Melody [M], or the Soloist [S].
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
29
Band-in-a-Box Standard Notation window.
The Standard Notation window is for notation display and the entry of chords.
Just type a chord name and it will be inserted at the current time line location.
The time line is the black vertical stripe just below the notation tool bar.
Toggle between Standard, Editable, and Staff Roll notation
modes with the [N] button.
Press the [Opt.] button to set Notation window options such as
resolution, chord position, split point, transpose options and
more.
Print out any part with the [Print] button. Pressing this button
opens the Print Options dialog where print settings are made.
Editable Notation Mode
Click on the [N] button to go from Standard Notation to Editable Notation
mode. Chords can be entered as in the Standard Notation window, the Editable
Notation mode also permits point-and-click entry of notes and rests as well as
drag-and-drop editing.
Band-in-a-Box Editable Notation window.
This is the screen for step-entry of a melody or for editing existing parts. Note
that each beat is sub-divided by either 3 or 4 broken vertical lines.
-
Swing styles use 3 lines to divide each beat into eighth note swing triplets.
-
Straight styles use 4 lines to divide each beat into sixteenth notes.
30
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Swing (triplet) Resolution
Straight (sixteenths) Resolution
Tip: Edits you make to Band-in-a-Box instrument parts will be overwritten when the [Play]
button is pressed and the program generates a new arrangement. To hear your edits use
the [Replay] button to play the song without regenerating the parts. Edited instrument parts
can be permanently saved to a MIDI file with the [.MID] button. The Melody and Soloist
tracks aren't affected, only the instrument parts generated by the program.
Play the Jukebox
Use the Jukebox for continuous playback of a list of Band-in-a-Box
songs. Click the [Juke] button to open the Juke Box Options dialog.
You’ll see a list of options that lets you control how the songs in the chosen
directory are played. When you have chosen the options you want, click [PLAY
JUKE BOX] to play all the songs in the selected directory folder.
Use the Preview feature to automatically audition a complete directory of songs
by playing a part of each song and then moving on to the next one, or use the [<]
and [>] cursor buttons to navigate manually through the list of juke box songs.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
31
Automatic Songs - “The Melodist”
Feel like composing a brand new song?
With Band-in-a-Box you can compose a new song, in the style of your choice
complete with intro, chords, melody, arrangement and improvisations, all
created by the program! All you have to do is pick from one of the Melodists
and press [OK] - the program then automatically generates the intro, chords,
melody, and arrangement in the chosen style. It even auto-generates a title!
You can go from nothing to a completed song in less than 1 second! Once the
song is generated, the chords and melody are part of the regular Band-in-Box
tracks, so may be edited, printed, and saved as with any other song!
You can also auto-regenerate any part of a song and modify it to suit you. The
Melodist will also generate a melody over an existing chord progression. A
Melodist “Juke Box” mode creates and performs new compositions in
succession.
Aside from the compositional values of the Melodist, the features can be used as
a powerful practicing aid - improving sight reading by reading the melodies
generated in various keys, and ear training - improving your “ear” by playing
along with the chord progressions in the generated songs.
Launching the Melodist
To launch the Melodist, press the [Melodist] button on the
main screen, or use the Shift+F5 hot keys.
32
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Import A MIDI File
With the amazing Band-in-a-Box Chord Wizard, you can convert any MIDI file
into a Band-in-a-Box song, complete with Melody and Solo parts.
MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard
Many people who play music by ear think of songs in terms of “Chords and
Melody.” However many MIDI files lack chord symbols, so they become
difficult to learn without the user having to figure out the chords in a time
consuming process.
Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band-in-a-Box, and Band-in-a-Box will
automatically figure out the chords of the song for you. It automatically
analyzes the MIDI file, figures out where the Bass, Piano, Melody, and other
tracks are, and then figures out the chord changes for the song. The chords are
written onto the Band-in-a-Box chordsheet like any other song. This allows you
to quickly learn how to play a song from a MIDI file - just read it into Band-ina-Box and you'll see the chord symbols, and then learn the melody! You can
also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist tracks.
To import the chords from a MIDI file, blank the chordsheet, by choosing File |
New. Then select the menu item File | Import Chords from MIDI File or press
the keystrokes (Ctrl+Option+I). This launches the Chord Wizard dialog.
“Chord Wizard” MIDI file interpretation dialog.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
33
Select your MIDI file to import with the [Open (Change)…] button. The Chord
Wizard will automatically detect the settings for your song, choosing a Preset
will help the Chord Wizard make the correct choices for the type of song you
are importing.
Make Your Own Songs
Now that you know how much fun it is to play music with Band-in-a-Box,
you’ll be pleased to see how easy it is to make songs of your own. This section
shows you how to make a new song, with step-by-step instructions from start to
finish.
Start with a clean sheet. Use either the menu command File | New or Edit |
Clear Lead sheet, or the keystrokes Cmd+N to blank the chordsheet.
Name the song. Enter the title of the song by clicking in the title area.
Select the Key
Click on the key select list and change the key of your song
instantly. Click on “YES” to the “OK to transpose Lead sheet?”
prompt and Band-in-a-Box will automatically transpose the entire
song.
Type in the chords
The chords we will enter are F for 1/2 a bar, Bb for 1/2 a
bar, and C7 for a bar.
Mouse click on the first cell in the chordsheet and type in the chord symbol.
The chord name will appear in the chord box. Press the return key to enter the
chord on the chordsheet and advance the chord cell ½ bar. To enter two chords
in a chord cell, type the chord names separated by a comma, e.g., f,bb. Continue
until the song is complete.
This song will have no intro, and the chorus will be 32 bars long. The
chordsheet we want to end up with will look something like this:
34
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Copying and pasting a section of chords
Since many songs repeat the same sequence of chords throughout, a faster
method to enter a song into Band-in-a-Box is to COPY and PASTE the
repeating chords.
Highlight a section of chords by dragging the mouse over them while holding
the left mouse button. The area will be blackened/highlighted.
Press Cmd+C, or select the Edit | Copy menu item. The highlighted area will
be copied to the clipboard. It can then be pasted back into the chordsheet at any
location, and reused as many times as you like.
Move the highlight cell to the bar that you want to paste the chords into, using
the arrow keys or the mouse.
Paste the copied section with press Cmd+V command, or select the Edit | Paste
menu item. The chords will then appear at the new location.
Choose a Style
The Style Picker window allows easy selection of Styles by Category, Full
Style Title, Memo, and examples of songs that work in that style. This list may
be printed out. For example, you can select Jazz styles, and see all the Jazz
styles in Band-in-a-Box displayed. Then you can select a style such as
GARNER.STY and see a full title, description of the style and examples of
songs appropriate to the style. You won’t have to go “hunting” for the style you
want any more. This information may be printed out.
You get to the StylePicker window by pressing the [.STY]
button or Ctrl+F9. This launches the StylePicker window.
Choose the “Show Styles Filter” to display all styles, or only styles that match
the prototype partially or fully.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
35
Category List: Use the Category list on the left to select a style category (Jazz /
Pop etc.) or a style set. Click on the list to choose.
Style List: Once chosen, you’ll see the list of styles available in that category or
style set. You’ll see the name of the style, and the file name for the style.
Memo and Examples: Click on a style to see a memo for the song, a list of
songs that could be played using that style, and the suggested tempo range.
Double click on the style name to exit the dialog, and load the style.
If you have added new styles to Band-in-a-Box then you
can re-build this list.
This allows you to print the styles list. It copies the list
to the clipboard. Then you open up your favorite word
processor (like Word for Mac, or BB Edit). Inside your
word processor, select File | Print and print the list.
The Search button helps you find data in any of the
fields.
Frame the song
Here we have selected bar one to be the first bar
of the chorus and bar 32 to be the last. The
chorus will repeat three times before proceeding
to the two bar ending.
36
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Set the Tempo
Let’s set the tempo to 160 beats per minute. The tempo is displayed in
the song title window with a default setting of 120 beats per minute.
Click with the mouse to adjust the tempo in increments of 5 beats per minute.
Clicking on the top of the numbers increases the tempo setting, clicking on the
bottom decreases it. The tempo can also be typed into the Main Settings dialog,
which opens from the menu Song | Title/Key/Tempo/Embel…, or with the
keystrokes Cmd+K. You can click 4 times on the metronome in this dialog to
set your tempo.
Tap the Tempo
Not sure of the tempo for your song? Tap it in real time on either the [-] key or
the [=] key on your computer keyboard. Four taps on the minus key sets the
tempo, four taps on the equal key sets the tempo and starts the song playing.
Finishing the Song Arrangement
Use the powerful musical intelligence of features like the Harmonies and the
Soloist to add the final touches to your song. The Edit Bar Settings dialog (F5
function key) lets you fine-tune your arrangement by changing patches, styles,
harmonies, tempo, and meter anywhere in the song.
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
37
Record a Melody
Band-in-a-Box has 2 built-in sequencer tracks so you can record and edit your
own melodies or solos. These tracks are recorded from a MIDI keyboard (or
other MIDI controller) connected to Band-in-a-Box by your MIDI driver.
Press the [Rec] button to begin recording. This launches
the Record Track dialog box.
You can punch in, overdub, and record directly to the ending or the tag, and use
the filter to choose which MIDI events are recorded.
Pressing the [Record] button will start Band-in-a-Box recording what you play
on the Thru track. An audible count is played in prior to recording.
Once you have completed recording your melody Band-in-a-Box will ask you if
you would like to keep the take and if you would like to copy the recorded
chorus to the whole song.
38
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
Tip: Looking for inspiration? At the click of a button, the Band-in-a-Box Melodist will write
completely new songs from scratch, complete with Chords, Intro, Melody, Solo, Ending,
and even an original Title. Or you can enter your own chord changes and let the Melodist
create a new melody over them. There are more than 100 Jazz, Pop, Rock, Latin, Country,
and Classical melody styles.
Adding Lyrics to your song
Click on the [Lyrics] button in the toolbar to open the lyrics window.
Use the cursor arrows to move down and enter your lyrics a line at a time. Two
lines of lyrics are displayed while the song is playing, and the lyrics are
highlighted as the highlight cell moves across the chordsheet.
Congratulations!
Now you know how to produce a complete song arrangement in Band-in-a-Box
with a Melody, Solo, Harmonies, and Lyrics; either from scratch or from an
imported MIDI file. You can print out clean lead sheet notation, complete with
chord symbols. And you can save your song in MIDI form for playback from
your computer or over the Internet, or to send as an e-mail attachment. You’re
on your way to making lots of great music with Band-in-a-Box.
Have Fun!
Chapter 4: Guided Tour of Band-in-a-Box
39
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
Overview of the Main Screen
Here is the main screen of Band-in-a-Box, as it looks after you load in a song.
40
1.
The Status Bar is used to show the program running status (i.e.
playback, paused, etc.) and the name of the song at the top of the
screen.
2.
The Synth Window is the area between the Status Bar and the Piano
Keyboard where instrument patches are set and levels are adjusted.
This area also includes buttons for Band-in-a-Box plug-ins.
3.
The Tool Bar area under the piano keyboard has buttons for program
controls and for direct access to important program features and menus.
4.
The Title Window displays song information including the title, tempo,
style, key, chorus, and harmony settings.
5.
The Chordsheet area occupies the lower part of the screen. Chord
changes for the song are typed into the numbered bars (cells) in the
sheet. “a” and “b” part markers are entered here to switch between the
“a” and “b” Band-in-a-Box substyles.
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
Status Bar
The first thing to note is that the name of the song that is open is identified in the
window title at the top of the screen. This feature is handy when you want to
know the status (and the title) of your song at a glance. You'll also see the
length of the song in minutes and seconds, this updates if you change the tempo
and press the [Play] button.
Plug-ins
To launch the Drums Window, click the Drums button, or choose the
GM – Drum Kit Window option. Once you do that, the Drums Window
will display. This is an animated display of a complete GM drum kit.
To launch the Guitar window, press the Guitar button, or
Control+Shift+G or choose the menu item Notation | Guitar Window.
This launches the Generate Chords for Intro (or Remove Intro) dialog
to create a chord progression that is inserted as an intro to the song.
Click on the Song Title button to create a new title for the current song.
The title will appear in the Title Window area of the screen.
Press the PG button to get to the www.pgmusic.com web site. This uses
your Internet Explorer or Netscape program as the browser.
Click on the Event List Editor button to launch the List Edit dialog,
which lets you edit the individual MIDI events on a track from a list.
(The Event List Editor is not present in the OS X version, though it
should get added in the future.)
Click on the Tuner Button to launch the Guitar Tuner. Plug your guitar
into the microphone or line-in and this plug-in will tune your guitar. Also
works with the microphone input for any other instrument.
(The Tuner is not present in the OS X version, though it should get added
in the future.)
The note button opens the Notation window to view and print notation
for any part. There are also Editable Notation and Staff Roll Notation
views.
The speaker button opens the Audio Levels dialog where master volume
settings can be adjusted. (Not present in the OS X version.)
The grace note button opens the Melody Embellisher dialog where
settings are made for live embellishment during playback.
Click this button to launch the Chord Builder dialog where you can
preview chords, roots, and extensions and send them to the chordsheet.
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
41
Synth Window / Piano Keyboard
The Piano Keyboard
This keyboard displays the notes that are being played by all instruments on
various parts of the piano keyboard during playback (except drums).
The MIDI Thru is also displayed on the Keyboard.
Synthesizer Window
Part Settings
The Bass/Piano/Drum/Guitar/Soloist/Strings/Melody and Thru buttons are
referred to as Parts. Settings that can be changed for an individual part include
Reverb, Chorus, Pan, Bank, Volume, and Instrument. To change a setting for
one of the parts:
-
Select the Part by mouse clicking on the part name.
-
Change the desired parameter to affect the new setting.
The [H] button launches a graphic Help dialog box of the
keyboard/part settings area.
The [M] button mutes the currently selected instrument.
You can also Option-Click an Instrument button.
The [JUKE] button launches the Band-in-a-Box Jukebox.
The [Combo] button lets you assign favorite instrument combos.
The Instrument Panel shows the current instrument for the selected part.
You can access your patches with ease through the “patches popup” menu. To
access this menu, simply click on the instrument box you would like to change
(i.e. Piano, Bass, Sol, etc.), move your mouse pointer over the instrument panel
box (i.e. Piano: (1) Acoustic Piano), and click anywhere on the instrument name.
Then select the new patch from the popup menu.
42
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
The Favorite Instrument Panel allows you to assign up to 10 of your favorite
instruments for each instrument part.
Selecting Favorite Instruments (Patches)
To select a Favorite Instrument for a particular part, you need to select the
instrument part by clicking on the desired part.
Then click on one of the 10 Favorite buttons.
The Favorite Instrument that was assigned to one of the numbers between 1 and
10 will appear in the Instrument Panel.
Selecting Favorite Combos
To send one of the Favorite Combo patch changes, you need to select the
“Combo” part by clicking on the Combo button.
Then click on one of the 10 Favorite buttons.
The Favorite Combo that was assigned to one of the numbers between 1 and 10
will appear in the Instrument Panel.
This section allows you to adjust the settings for Reverb, Chorus, Panning,
Bank, and Volume for each instrument part.
Description of the Wizard
The Wizard is an intelligent play along feature that uses your QWERTY
keyboard to play along with Band-in-a-Box. This also allows you to record to
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
43
the melody or soloist track without an external MIDI keyboard, and can even be
used to trigger the Soloist Wizard. Also, play along using the Wizard can use
the harmony feature, so you can play along live from your QWERTY keyboard
in 4-part Saxophone harmony for example.
Turning the Wizard On/Off
Click on the [Wz] box to turn the Wizard feature On/Off, or select
the Wizard Playalong option from the Song menu, or press
Option+W. The Wizard is only active during playback.
Playing the Wizard
The Wizard keys are active during playback. The active keys are the lower 2
rows of the keyboard.
Changing Instruments / Settings For The Wizard
The Wizard is a play along instrument, so is treated just like the THRU
instrument. Changing Instruments/Volume/Reverb etc. for the Wizard is
therefore the same as for the THRU instrument. (i.e., Click on the THRU
button, then select instrument etc.) You can record the Wizard and it will use
THRU harmonies if selected.
Play Regular Notes
There is now an option to play regular “non-smart” notes, for those of you up to
the task of poking out actual melodies on your QWERTY keys.
In the Song menu, toggle Wizard Uses 'Smart' Notes “Off” (unchecked) to have
the Wizard provide you access to a chromatic scale, and toggle “on” to have
Band-in-a-Box provide you with notes based on the chord/key of the song.
Soloist Wizard
Additionally, you will find another great Wizard feature in the Soloist menu; the
Solo Wizard. Toggling this option “on” enables the Soloist Wizard. As you
play notes on the MIDI or QWERTY keyboard, the program will play “correct”
notes in the style of the current Soloist! This means that you can play a perfect
solo every time, simply by pressing any key on your MIDI keyboard or
QWERTY keys.
Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess,
this feature has practical implications as well. For example, you can concentrate
on practicing your solo phrasing and playing “in time” without concerning
yourself with which notes to play (Band-in-a-Box will supply the correct notes:
see the next section for details.)
Recording Using the Wizard
To record the Wizard, press the [Rec] button to record, and play the Wizard.
This will be recorded. You can use the feature of recording the Wizard to enter
44
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
music without a MIDI keyboard that doesn't sound as stiff as most music entered
in step time. This is how it works:
-
Press [Rec] to record.
-
As the song plays, play the melody that you want on any Wizard key, using
the same key for each note, in the rhythm of the melody. The Wizard notes
won't be the exact melody, but don't worry about that as you record.
-
When you're finished, go to the Notation window. You now have the notes
with the correct durations and times, but the wrong pitches.
-
One by one drag the notes up to the correct melody note, holding down the
shift, control, and key for sharps, flats, and naturals respectively. You'll
then have entered a melody that sounds like it was recorded from a
keyboard, without the stiff sound of a melody entered in step time!
Note: If you have the wizard on, the SPACEBAR won't stop playback. You need to press
ESCAPE to stop playback if the Wizard is on. This is because people mistakenly hit the
spacebar while playing the wizard, which would stop the song inadvertently.
Higher Bank Patches
The [+] button on the instrument selection panel will give you easy
access to patches on higher banks. These are selected from a .PAT
file that corresponds to your synth or sound module. We have included many
.PAT files in the Synth Kits folder.
Press the [+] button to launch the Patches on Higher Banks dialog. To narrow
your search you can do one or all of the following:
-
Open the Patch list and select an instrument (i.e. Electric Bass, Acoustic
Piano, etc.)
-
Click on the “Include Family” checkbox to have other offerings of similar
type shown. (i.e., all Bass family patches, all keyboard family patches, etc.)
-
Find a patch by keyword by clicking the [Search..] button and typing some
letters that you know are in the name, e.g., “mando” will find your
mandolin patch and any others containing “mando.”
Note: You can open a new patch file by pressing the [Open *.PAT…] button. You can also
customize the names and descriptions of the patch file list to suit your tastes by pressing
the [Edit…] button and editing a small text file. Press the [Update] button for your changes
to take effect. You can also open this window by selecting the M | Choose Patch from
Higher Bank… menu item at the bottom of the menu.
Tool Bar
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
45
The [Play] button starts generation and playback of a
song.
The [Stop] button is to stop a song that is currently
playing.
The [Replay] button allows you to replay a song without
reconstructing it.
The [Hold] button pauses the currently playing song.
Press the [Hold] button again to resume playing the song.
The [From] button allows you to play a song from a
particular bar.
The [Rec] button launches the Record Track dialog box
allowing you to record a melody for your song.
The [Lyrics] button brings up a two line lyric display
allowing you to type lyrics to a song.
The [Notation] button launches the Standard Notation
Window.
Use the [Open] button to select a song to load into the
program.
The [Save] button is to save a song to disk.
The [.MID] button is for making Standard MIDI Files.
You can save a Standard MIDI File to disk as a file with a
prefix “SMF” or to the Macintosh clipboard.
The [.STY] button allows you to choose from styles in
any folder that contains Band-in-a-Box style files.
Press the [Melodist] button (or use the keystrokes
Shift+F5) to launch the Melodist.
The [Solo] button launches the Select Soloist dialog box,
allowing you to choose a Soloist for your song.
The [Copy] button allows you to copy particular bars
and/or melody to another area in the song.
The [Print] button launches the Print Options dialog box
on the Notation window to print Lead Sheets.
Title Window
46
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
In the Title window you can create a Song Title, change the Style of the song,
change the Key Signature the song is using, define the Tempo of the song,
define where the Chorus begins and ends and how many Choruses the song
has. To change these settings, click on the setting you wish to change.
Favorite songs
button Favorite styles
button The favorite songs button [F] activates a list of your most recently played 150
songs. This allows you to quickly load songs that have been used in your last
sessions with Band-in-a-Box. You will find this to be the best way to load songs
into Band-in-a-Box, since the list generated will give you instant access to the
songs you are most likely to be playing with, regardless of where the song is
located on your hard drive. Check “OK To Add recent files...” to allow your
recently loaded songs to be added to this list. (File | Open Favorite Songs... or
Shift+F3 also opens this window.)
Press the [song] button (or Ctrl+F3) to launch the Select song
by Title window, described in full elsewhere in this manual.
Tip: Click the “Play when selected” checkbox at the bottom of the song list window to have
Band-in-a-Box play your song immediately upon selection.
Like the favorite songs button, the favorite styles button [f] activates a window
with a list of the 150 styles you have used most recently. This lets you quickly
load in styles that have been used your last few sessions with Band-in-a-Box.
This will likely become your preferred method of choosing styles in Band-in-aBox since your favorite styles are usually near the top of the list. Click the
“Play When Chosen” checkbox to have Band-in-a-Box play your song
immediately upon selecting a style. (User | Open Favorite Styles... or Shift+F9
also opens this window.)
You get to the StylePicker window by pressing the [.STY]
button or with the keystrokes Ctrl+F9. This feature is
explained in full elsewhere in this manual.
Harmony Area
The Harmony area displays the current Melody and Thru Harmony.
The [M] button is for Melody Harmony - in this case it's set to trumpet/trombone
(3rds) harmony. Whatever the melody plays will come out with
trumpet/trombone harmony in thirds. Pressing the [f] button allows you to
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
47
choose from a list of only your most frequently used harmonies. Pressing the
[M] button allows you to choose from the full list of harmonies. The F10 key
disables the Melody harmony.
The [T] button is for Thru harmony. Whatever you play along on your MIDI
keyboard while the song is playing will be auto-harmonized in real time - in this
case using a Tenor Banjo type harmony. Pressing the [f] button allows you to
choose from a list of only your most frequently used harmonies. Pressing the
[T] button allows you to choose from the full list of harmonies. The keystrokes
Ctrl+F10 disable the Thru harmony.
The Embellisher
Click on the Embellisher checkbox to enable live embellishment
of the Melody or Soloist part during playback.
When musicians see a lead sheet that has a melody written out, they would
almost never play it exactly as written. They would change the timing to add
syncopation, change durations to achieve staccato or legato playing, add grace
notes, slurs, extra notes, vibrato, and other effects. If you enable the
Embellisher, any Melody will get embellished as it is played so that you hear a
livelier, more realistic Melody - and it's different every time. The Embellisher is
only active while the music is playing, it doesn't permanently affect the Melody
track. There is an option to make the Embellishment permanent, so that if you
like a certain embellishment you can add it to the Melody track. This is
especially useful to spice up songs that have been entered in step time with
“robotic” velocities and durations of notes. Using the Embellisher makes it
sound like a person was playing instead of a computer!
Chordsheet Area
Chord Entry
The basic way of entering a song in Band-in-a-Box is by typing in the chords to
the song using the computer keyboard. Chords are typed in using standard
chord symbols (Like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb13#9/E)
Another way of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition. Play any
chord on your MIDI keyboard; and Band-in-a-Box will recognize it instantly
and insert it onto the chordsheet. This allows you to enter an entire song without
having to type in any of the chords!
To use this feature, select the Insert current MIDI chord from the M menu.
(Ctrl+Return is the keystroke combination for this function.)
48
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
The chord you choose will be automatically inserted into your song (chordsheet
or notation view) at the current cursor location. Then, Band-in-a-Box is ready
for the next chord. You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion.
User Settings for the Main Screen
You can choose different colors for the chordsheet area of the screen, and you
can also choose to use larger fonts for the chord display. These two settings are
found in the Edit | Preferences 2 menu.
Support for larger screen sizes allows the program to fill the entire screen.
There are also options to restrict the screen size to a certain size. To force the
screen size to a certain size, use the Edit | Preferences… “Limit Screen size to”
item.
Chapter 5: The Main Screen
49
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
In the QuickStart Tutorial it’s as “easy as 1-2-3” to make great music on your
computer using the intelligent automatic accompaniment features of Band-in-aBox. This PowerGuide provides detailed song making instructions and
configuration settings for the Band-in-a-Box “power user.”
Song Settings
Song settings include the title, key signature, and tempo for a song and the
Band-in-a-Box style for its arrangement.
Main Settings
The Main Settings dialog shows all the settings for the song. Go to Song |
Title/Key/Tempo/Embel… or use the keystrokes +k to open the dialog.
Settings can be entered directly into the dialog.
Most of these settings can be made in the Title window on the main screen.
Band-in-a-Box Title window.
Key Changes (Transposition)
The key signature of the song is displayed in the Title window.
50
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
To change the key, click on the key signature. This
displays a popup menu where you choose the new
key that you would like. Band-in-a-Box then asks if
it is “OK to transpose Lead sheet?” If you answer
[Yes] the entire song will be transposed to a new key.
Answer [No] and the key signature will change but
the song will not be transposed. Select [Cancel] to
exit without changing the key signature.
Setting Tempo
The tempo of the song is displayed on the main screen in the Title window.
Tempo can be set on the computer keyboard with 4 taps of either the minus (-)
key or the equals (=) key. When the tempo is tapped on the [=] key, song
playback will start automatically at the tapped tempo.
To change the tempo of a song while the song is playing you may use the [ and ]
keys to change the tempo by 5 at a time. Or you can move the mouse pointer over the
tempo setting and click the mouse as follows:
The tempo display is broken up into 4 quadrants.
Mouse clicking in these four areas will change the
tempo by +1, -1, +5, or -5 before or during play.
You can change the tempo at any bar in the song with the Edit Bar Settings
dialog box. Press F5 or the keystroke combination Option+B or go to Bar
Settings in the Edit menu to open the dialog. The tempo change you enter takes
effect at the beginning of the bar and remains until a new tempo change at
another bar is inserted.
Song Intros, Choruses and Endings
A typical song has the following elements:
-
Introduction (Intro). If present is typically 4 bars long.
-
Chorus(es). Typically 3 or 4 choruses in a 3-minute song.
-
Ending. Typically a 2 bar ending following all of the choruses.
Note: We use the term “chorus” as it is used in Jazz music. A chorus therefore means
once through the entire form of the song. A typical length of a chorus is 32 bars. A song
may have the form AABA where the A sections are verses and the B section is the bridge.
This entire form AABA is considered one chorus.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
51
Adding An Intro.
You select the beginning and end bars of the chorus. If you select a bar greater
than 1 for the first bar of the chorus, then Band-in-a-Box knows that you want
the previous bars for an intro.
Example: 4 bar intro to a song.
Type in the 4 bars of intro chords, starting at bar 1 of the chordsheet. Then at
bar 5 you will begin typing in the chords of the chorus. Set the beginning of the
chorus to bar 5, by selecting the Chorus begins at option on the Song menu and
then clicking on the measure of the first bar of the chorus.
Auto-Generate Intro Bars.
Band-in-a-Box will automatically generate a chord progression as an intro to
your song. Go to Edit | Intro Bars Auto-Generate or press Ctrl+Shift+B to
access the Generate Chords for Intro dialog.
Selecting Bars To Begin And End The Chorus.
Bar number for Chorus to begin.
Click on the chorus begin number in the Title window, or select the Chorus
begins at option on the Song menu, or press +b. The message “Click on a Bar
#” will start to blink in the toolbar. Mouse click on the bar number to begin the
chorus. The bar number that you select will then be displayed.
Bar number for Chorus to end.
Click on the chorus end number in the Title window, or select the Chorus ends
at option on the Song menu, or press +e. The message “Click on a Bar #”
will start to blink in the toolbar. Mouse click on the bar number to end the
chorus. The bar number that you select will then be displayed.
52
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Number of choruses to play.
Click on the number where the number of choruses are displayed on the
Title/Key/Tempo/Chorus Window and select the number of choruses from the
Pop-Up Menu or select Total Choruses = from the Song menu or press +l.
The number of choruses will then be displayed.
Additional Song Settings
The Additional Song Settings dialog box is accessed by selecting the [More …]
button in the Main Settings dialog or choosing Additional Song Settings … from
the Song menu. These are additional song settings that are saved with the song.
Vary Style in Middle Choruses
Default =
If checked, the song will play in substyle B throughout the Middle Choruses.
The Middle Choruses include all choruses except the first and last. If not
checked, the middle choruses will play “a” and “b” substyles as set in the
chordsheet with part markers.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
53
For example, in Jazz Swing, since the “b” substyle is Swing, all of the middle
choruses will have swing bass. (The “a” substyle is playing half notes on the
bass.)
Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses
Default =
This is used if you have put pushes into a song, but don't want the pushes to play
in the middle choruses. The middle choruses are usually used for soloing, so
you may not want the pushes to play.
Allow Rests in First Chorus
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to play in
the first chorus.
Allow Rests in Middle Choruses
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to play in
the middle choruses. The middle choruses are usually used for soloing, so you
may not want the rests to play.
Allow Rests in Last Chorus
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to play in
the last chorus.
Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses
Default =
This determines whether Pedal Bass effect will be allowed in middle choruses.
Allow Embellishment of Chords
Default =
The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords. This means that if you type a
C7 chord the piano player may play a C13 or a C7b9. This makes the
arrangement sound more authentic.
Tip: If you are hearing flat 9 and flat 13 embellishments on a C7 chord that is clashing with
the melody, you should rename the chord C9 or C13, which will ensure natural 9 and 13
embellishments. To disable the embellishment for a certain song, uncheck this option.
There are very few situations that you wouldn't want it on, especially if you name some
chords as C9 instead of C7 in situations where the melody clashes with the embellishment,
as discussed above. You would need to uncheck it for any song that you don't want it on.
Tag Settings
A tag (or coda) is a group of bars that are played in the last chorus of a song. If
you check the “Tag Exists?” field, then the tag will play during the last chorus of
the song. The tag begins after the bar you specify as “Tag Jump After Bar #.”
The song then jumps to the “Tag Begin at Bar #” and plays until “Tag Ends
After Bar #.” At the end of the tag, the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual.
Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song
54
Default =
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
You can disable the ending for a certain song. You can disable the endings for
all songs by clearing the checkmark for the “Allow Any Endings” setting in the
Edit | Preferences menu item.
Start the 2 bar ending early The usual Band-in-a-Box ending is 2 bars
appended to the end of the song. This new option gives you an alternative to
end the song on the last bar of the song. Band-in-a-Box will still play an ending
on the chord that you specify, and the ending will occur as a 2 bar phrase
beginning 2 bars before the end of the form. This results in more natural
endings for many songs.
For example, the song Old Folks At Home is a 32-bar chorus song from bar 1 to
bar 32. It ends with the last melody note on bar 31 with the word “home,” but
Band-in-a-Box normally plays a 2 bar ending, starting at the end of bar 32 and
going for 2 bars more. For a song like this, it is more natural to end the song at
the end of bar 32.
To set this in Band-in-a-Box choose the Song | Additional Song Settings… item
and set “Start the ending 2 bars early” to true.
The Chordsheet
The chordsheet is a spreadsheet where the numbered cells represent bars of
music. The chord changes for the song are shown in the corresponding bars.
Band-in-a-Box chordsheet area.
As well as entering the chords for your song, the chordsheet is where you put in
style variations, fills, and breaks. Band-in-a-Box gives you lots of easy ways to
enter song information into the chordsheet, but first we’ll go over the basics.
Typing Chords
The basic way of entering a song in Band-in-a-Box is by typing the chords for
the song into the chordsheet.
The location of the black highlight cell determines
where chords are entered. Use either the mouse or
the cursor arrow keys on the computer keyboard to
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
55
move the chord highlight cell around the chordsheet. Click on any bar to
position the highlight cell, then type in the chords for that bar.
The highlight cell covers two beats, or half a bar in 4/4 time. Two chord names
can be typed into the highlight cell (separated by a comma e.g. C, C#dim) so up
to four chords per bar may be entered.
To enter a chord, type its name using standard chord symbols (like C, or Fm7, or
Bb7, or Bb13#9/E) and press the return key. The chord name(s) you have
typed will be entered in the chordsheet at the current location of the highlight
cell. Each time the return key is pressed the highlight cell advances 2 beats, or
½ a measure.
Note: To view a list of Band-in-a-Box chord names, please refer to the online Help.
To start typing in chords:
-
Go to the top (bar 1) of the chordsheet by clicking on measure 1.
-
Blank the chordsheet by selecting the “New” option from the File menu, or
with the keystrokes +n.
-
The highlight cell will be at the start of bar 1, reposition it if desired.
-
When you have the highlight cell positioned where you want to enter a
chord type the name of the chord you would like. For example, type c6 to
get the C6 chord.
You should never have to use the shift key, as Band-in-a-Box will sort this out
for you. Here are some other tips for easy chord entry:
-
Use b for a flat, e.g. Bb7. It is not necessary to type upper or lower case;
the program will sort this out for you.
-
Use # or 3 for a sharp, e.g. F#7. (# is the uppercase symbol of 3, so you can
actually type F37 to get F#7. Band-in-a-Box will sort out the case, saving
you the effort of using <SHIFT>3 to type the # symbol.)
-
Use / for slash chords with alternate Roots such as C7/E (C7 with E bass)
-
Use a comma (,) to enter 2 chords in a cell. In the example below, we
would type Ab9,G9 to get the 2 chords in the cell (on beat 3 and 4 of bar 2)
The sequence of keystrokes to enter all these chords above would be
c6>am7>dm7>ab9,g9>c6/e>>a739. The > indicates cursor key to the right.
(We are able to type A7#9 as a739 because Band-in-a-Box knows to use the
uppercase of the 3, which is #.)
Tip: The fastest way to type in chords is to use your left hand to type in the chords. Your
right hand stays on the cursor keys (or mouse) to advance the highlight cell to the next
bar/beat after you've typed in the chords.
56
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Shortcut Chords.
If you enter a lot of songs, you'll appreciate these shortcut keys:
-
J = Maj7
-
H=m7b5 (H stands for Half diminished)
-
D=dim
-
S=Sus
Example: To type CMaj7, just type CJ (it will be entered as CMaj7)
Add your own chord shortcuts.
Have you found a chord that Band-in-a-Box doesn't recognize? If so, add it to
your chord shortcuts file, and Band-in-a-Box will allow you to type in that chord
in the future. You can also define chord “shortcuts,” one-letter abbreviations for
longer chord names (“J” for “Maj7” etc.).
To add your own chords and shortcuts, make a text file called shortcut.txt in
your Band-in-a-Box folder. Note that this file doesn't ship with Band-in-a-Box;
if it did it would overwrite your file! Shortcuts supplied by PG Music are in a
file named pgshortc.txt, which should be used only by PG Music.
If you find a chord that Band-in-a-Box won't accept like Csus2, when it expects
C2 instead, you can enter this as a single line in shortcut.txt, “[email protected]” (without
the quotes). Band-in-a-Box will then enter the chord C2 if you type in Csus2, in
other words you can type in Csus2 and the program will accept it. You can also
use it for shortcuts, just as [email protected] lets you type Cj for CMaj7. See the file
pgshortc.txt for examples of shortcuts.
MIDI Chord Recognition
Another way of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition. Play any
chord on your external MIDI keyboard or MIDI guitar controller and Band-in-aBox will recognize it instantly and insert it onto the chordsheet. This allows you
to enter an entire song without having to type any of the chords. It’s also a good
way to find the right name for a chord.
To use this feature, select the menu command M | Insert current MIDI chord, or
press the Ctrl+Return keys. The last chord you played on your MIDI keyboard
controller will be automatically inserted into your song (chordsheet or notation
view) at the current cursor location. Then, Band-in-a-Box is ready for the next
chord. You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion.
Erase Chords
To erase chords, place the highlight cell over top of the chords you would like to
erase. Press the [spacebar] once. Then move your cursor to the right or left, or
mouse click on another measure, and the chord(s) will be erased.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
57
Insert or Delete Bars
Inserting or deleting measures in the chordsheet saves a lot of copying or retyping of chords when changes are made to an arrangement. The commands to
insert or delete bars from the chordsheet are:
-
To insert bars choose Edit | Insert Measure(s) or
given # of bars.
-
To delete bars choose Edit | Delete Measure(s) or
a given # of bars.
+i and you can insert a
+d and you can delete
Breaks: Rests, Shots, and Held Chords
Breaks are points in a song when one or more of the instruments rests, plays a
shot, or holds a chord.
Rests
You can have any, some, or all instruments rest at any bar. For example, you
could rest all instruments except the bass for the first 4 bars, then add in the
piano for 4 bars, and then add in the entire band for the rest of the song. You
may optionally disable the rests in the middle or final choruses (where people
are likely taking solos, and rests are not appropriate).
A chord is specified as a REST by adding 1 period after the chord.
indicates a C chord that is a REST.
Shots
You can make certain instruments play a “shot” where the chord is played and
then a rest follows. For example, the song “Rock Around The Clock” has a shot
on beat 1 followed by a rest for 2 bars.
A chord is specified as a SHOT by adding 2 periods after the chord.
indicates a C chord that is a SHOT.
Held Chords
You can specify that certain instruments hold a chord sustained for a certain
number of bars. For example, you can have the bass and piano hold a chord
sustained while the drums continue to play a pattern
A chord is HELD by adding 3 periods after the chord.
indicates a C chord that is a HELD.
We will now illustrate the effect of putting these breaks into the chord sheet. In
the examples that follow, bar 1 will have a normal chord then bar 2 will have a
chord with a break on it (a rest, shot, or held chord).
58
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
2 bars of C chord (no break on bar 2).
This is the usual situation without
any break. Note that the piano
plays rhythmically on bar 2.
Rest on bar 2.
This rests the instruments until the
next chord on the chordsheet. The
rest is typed in as a C chord
followed by one period.
A shot is put on bar 6.
The shot plays a staccato
chord on bar 6, and then
rests until the next chord
on the chordsheet. The
shot is typed as a C chord
followed by two periods.
This illustrates a held chord on bar 10.
The chord on bar 10 is held
(sustained) until the next
chord on the chordsheet. The
held chord is typed in as a C
followed by three periods.
“Breaks” for only some instruments.
You can specify that some instruments not be affected by the break. The coded
names for the instruments are:
-
B for Bass
-
D for Drums
-
P for Piano
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
59
-
G for Guitar
-
S for Strings
C.bd
To exempt instruments, add their letters following the break. Typing
C...p
This will put a held chord on all instruments except the piano.
c.bd will put a rest on all instruments EXCEPT the bass and drums.
Pushes
Pushes in Styles.
“Pushes” (also called anticipations) are chords that are played before the beat.
For example, in Jazz Swing, the piano player often “pushes” a chord change by
playing the chord an eighth note before the beat. Styles can push any instrument
so that the instrument plays before the chord begins. This is very common in
Jazz and other Pop music, and gives the music a more natural sound.
You need not be concerned with pushes that are in the styles as they happen
automatically. You need only to be aware that the styles can push the
instruments. This makes styles sound much better, and more syncopated.
Pushes in Songs.
Chords can be pushed by an 8th or 16th note. For example, you can specify a
chord to occur a 16th note before the beat and all instruments, including drums,
will play this.
You can also specify that a chord change should happen before the beat. To do
this, you can either use keystrokes, or the chord options dialog box. To use
keystrokes:
-
Type the caret symbol (^) before the chord. (The caret symbol is located
above the 6 on the keyboard).
-
Type a single caret to get a chord an eighth note before the beat.
e.g.
-
^C7
Type a double caret to get a chord a sixteenth note before the beat.
e.g.
^^C7
In Jazz styles (and other triplet feels), the chord will be pushed by a triplet,
regardless if there is a single or double caret (^^).
Chord Options Dialog Box
There is an alternative to the various keystrokes to put in rests and pushes. You
can use the Chord Options dialog box instead. To get to the dialog box, select
Chord Settings from the Edit menu or press Option+Z.
60
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
This allows you to select the various Breaks (Rests, Shots, and Held Chords) by
clicking on the various settings. You can change to different beats in the bar,
typing in new chords on the different beats.
Copying and Pasting a Section of Chords
Copying a section of chords is done in a manner similar to copying text in a
word processor. Highlight the area you would like to affect and select the
desired action(s) from the EDIT menu. (See below for additional details.)
Copying chords to the clipboard.
-
Select the region to copy.
-
Place the mouse cursor at the bar to begin the selection.
-
Then, holding down the mouse button, drag the mouse over the region. As
you do this, you’ll see that the region will be highlighted (white on black).
-
When you have selected (highlighted) the proper region of chords to copy,
you can copy the selected region to the clipboard with the keystrokes +c,
or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu.
Pasting chords to the chordsheet.
When you have copied some chords to the clipboard you can then paste them
into the chordsheet by:
-
Moving the highlight cell to the destination bar where you want to begin the
paste of chords. This can be done by clicking that bar with the mouse, or by
moving the highlight cell with the cursor arrows on the computer keyboard.
-
Press
+v or select Paste from the Edit menu.
Tip: Remember that the copied section remains in the clipboard and can be used
repeatedly. Example: If you're inputting a song with verse, verse, bridge, verse, you
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
61
can just copy the first verse to the Clipboard, and then paste in the other verses. The
clipboard remains even if you load in a new song, so you can copy and paste
between songs.
Copy Chords and/or Melody
You can copy and paste the chords, melody, and solo for a range of bars in the
Copy Chords and/or Melody dialog.
Press the [Copy] button to launch this dialog box, or
select Edit | Copy From.. To, or press Option+C.
Erase Chords and/or Melody
Select Edit | Erase From ..To or press Option+K to launch this dialog box.
As you can see, you can erase a number of bars of chords and/or melody and/or
soloist. If you're erasing the melody and/or soloist, you need to specify which
chorus you're erasing.
Support for Non-Standard Chord display types.
62
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
In addition to the Standard Notation window, you can also enter or display
chords in Roman Numeral Notation, Nashville notation, or Solfeggio Notation.
For example, the chord Gm7 in the key of F would be displayed as IIm7 (in
Roman Numeral Notation), 2m7 (in Nashville Notation), and Rem7 in Solfeggio.
These systems are very useful for learning or analyzing tunes, because they are
independent of the key signature. You can take an existing song and print it out
in Roman Numeral Notation, so you can study the chord progression. You can
also just type a chord in any of these systems, like “4” which will enter the 4
chord in the current key, and switch between systems without having to retype
the chords.
To change to one of the non-standard chord displays select the Preferences
option from the Edit menu or press Option+P. Click on the “Chord Display
Type” box and choose from the list of four options;
1.
Normal.
2.
Roman Numeral.
3.
Nashville Notation.
4.
Solfeggio Notation.
The Roman numeral and other non-standard displays use superscript for the
chord display when in the Notation window (or print out), so they look best in
the Notation window.
Tip: Print out a song in Nashville Notation or Roman Numeral notation. Then learn
the song this way (i.e. 1maj7 4maj7 3m7b5 67b9). You'll then discover that it is much
easier to play the song in any key.
Part Markers
Part Markers are placed on the chordsheet to indicate a new part of the song.
They are used to change substyles or insert drum fills.
These are part markers. They typically occur every 8 bars or so,
but may be placed at the beginning of any bar.
Placing Part Markers.
-
Move the highlight cell to the bar that you want the part marker at. Then
press the letter p on the computer keyboard. Repeatedly pressing the letter
p will toggle between the “a” and “b” part markers or no part marker.
-
Or you can position the mouse arrow directly over the bar line (or existing
part marker). Repeatedly click the mouse button to toggle between “a,”
“b,” and no part marker.
Changing Substyles.
The part markers also represent the two available substyles
(variations) for each style, the “a” substyle and the “b” substyle.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
63
The song continues to play in one substyle until it encounters a new part marker.
There will always be a part marker at bar 1 so that Band-in-a-Box knows what
substyle to begin with.
Substyle “a” is usually used for the Verses of the song.
Substyle “b” is usually used for the Bridge of the song, and for soloing in the
Middle Choruses. All of the middle choruses of the song will automatically play
in the “b” substyle. This is great for Jazz songs, allowing you to play swing
throughout the middle (soloing) choruses and revert to the “a” substyle for the
last chorus.
Note: If you want to keep the same substyle in the middle choruses, you would need
to uncheck the “Vary Style in Middle Choruses” option in the Additional Song Settings
option on the Song menu.
Placing Drum Fills.
A one bar drum fill will play in the bar preceding (leading into) a part marker,
just as a live drummer will play a fill to accent the transition between sections of
a song. If you want a drum fill to play in bar 7 of a song, insert a part marker at
bar 8. You can either retain the current substyle or change the substyle (“a” or
“b”) when you place the part marker.
Edit Bar Settings
After you have selected a bar, press the F5 function key or the keystrokes
Option+B, or select Bar Settings from the Edit menu, to open the Edit Bar
Settings dialog. Settings such as number of beats per bar, tempo changes, style
changes, patch changes, and harmony changes can be made in this dialog.
64
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
When making any changes to a measure using the Edit Bar Settings dialog box,
Band-in-a-Box will place a colored indicator box around the measure number of
the measure that had been edited.
Change the Number of beats/bar.
The initial time signature of the song is determined by the style (e.g. Jazz =4/4,
Waltz =3/4). In certain songs you will want to insert time signature changes at a
certain bar. For example you might want a single bar of 2/4, or 8 bars of 3/4
time etc.
This option allows a change of time signature during a song. The change takes
place at the beginning of the bar and continues until a new time signature change
is specified. You can select # beats per bar from 1 to 4 beats per bar. A setting
of 0 beats/bar is used for no change of time signature.
Examples:
A song in 4/4 time with a single bar of 6/4 time. Since the maximum # beats per
bar is =4, we will split the 6/4 bars into 2 bars, a 4/4 bar and a 2/4 bar. Insert a #
beats per bar =2 at the beginning of the 2/4 bar and then restore the time
signature to 4/4 by assigning # beats per bar =4 for the next bar.
A song in 5/4 time throughout: To do this we will alternately create a 3/4 bar +
2/4 bars. On odd numbered bars insert a # beats per bar =3, and on even bars
insert # of beats per bar =2. This needs to be done for every bar.
Style Changes at any Bar.
You can specify a new style at any bar of the song, so that you can use many
styles within the same song. To change styles at any bar:
-
Move the cursor highlight bar to the bar for the style change.
-
Press the F5 key to open the Edit Bar Settings dialog (or choose the Edit |
Bar Settings menu command, or use the keystrokes Option+B).
Use the [Change Style to] button to select a
style change for that bar.
If you prefer, use the [STY…] button to
select a style using the StylePicker dialog.
To remove the style change at this bar,
press the [Clear] button.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
65
You should select a style that is present in the Styles folder in Band-in-a-Box (or
the same folder where the song resides).
Note: If you want to mix styles with 3/4 and 4/4 time signatures you should make the
main style used in the song a 4/4 style. You could then change back to 3/4 at bar 1 if
you want.
-
When you select a style change, you'll notice that there is a red frame drawn
around the bar line. This indicates that there is a style change (or other
change at that bar) found in the Edit Bar Settings dialog.
Tempo Change At This Bar.
Most songs will have a single tempo throughout, but if you want to change the
tempo at a certain bar of the song, then use this dialog box to type in the new
tempo in beats per minute. Or type in a relative tempo change in a range of –90
to +100. A setting of –50 halves the tempo, a setting of 100 doubles it.
Tempo can also be set by clicking on the metronome button. Clicking
on this button 4 times will set the tempo to your tapped-in value. The
tempo change takes effect at the beginning of the bar and remains
until a new tempo change at another bar is inserted.
Patch Changes at any Bar.
This setting allows you to insert a patch change at the beginning of any bar.
Type the number of the patch change in the appropriate box (i.e. Bass, Soloist,
etc.) that you want to affect.
Note: To save a song with patch changes at the beginning of the song you should use the
Edit | Save Song with Patches… dialog instead of this one.
Harmony Change At Any Bar/Beat.
You can insert harmony changes into the song at any bar and beat. For
example, start the song with “no harmony” then have “SuperSax” come in on
the bridge, then “Shearing” on the next chorus, etc. This is also effective when
used with the Soloist on the Thru part. With this setting, you can have multiple
types of horn section solos (i.e. Brass, Sax, etc.) or harmonized distortion guitar
effects for guitar solos.
Chord Preview/Builder
You can instantly hear how any chord sounds by selecting it in the chordsheet
and pressing Shift+Return, or use the “Chord Builder” feature to audition
different chords until you find the one that sounds best to you. In other words,
you can enter chords “by ear” without having to know the actual chord names or
any music theory. This feature also illustrates the differences between various
chord types.
66
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Previewing Chords
This feature allows you to hear chords as you to type them in. When you are
entering chords onto the Chord sheet (or notation window), after you type a
chord name, press Shift+Return. This enters the chord onto the chord sheet and
then plays the chord for you, using the patches on the Piano part and Bass part.
You can also listen to a chord that has already been entered, by just pressing
Shift+Return after moving to that bar with the chord. If there is no chord
entered at that bar, you will hear the last chord that was entered.
You can also preview chords from the Chord Options dialog. Press Option+Z
to launch the dialog, and then press the [Preview] button to hear the current
chord in the Chord Options dialog.
Chord Builder
This feature allows you to hear and build chords up by clicking on the root,
extension (and alternate root if applicable). You can launch the chord builder by
choosing the User | Chord Builder menu option or with the keystrokes
Ctrl+Shift+H.
You'll then see the following Chord Builder dialog:
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
67
You can now click on the root of the chord (in the “Root” group), the extension
(Maj7 etc.), and also an alternate “slash-note” root. For example, to make the
chord F9/A, you would click on the “F” root, the “9” extension, and the Slash
Root of /A. As you click on them, you'll hear the bass note played on the Bass
part, and the extension played on the Piano track.
If you are happy with the sound of the chord, you can press the [Enter Chord]
button to enter the chord at the bar and beat specified. If you would like the
chord to be inserted automatically when you click on the note/extension names,
select the “Enter chord when clicked” option. Change the Bar/Beat settings to
enter at a different bar.
The Chord Builder can be left open as you work entering chords into Band-ina-Box. Remember that you can also play chords in from the MIDI keyboard by
pressing Ctrl+Return after you've played a chord.
MIDI file “Chord Wizard”
This allows you to read in the chords from any MIDI file and write them onto
the Band-in-a-Box chordsheet.
-
First, blank the song by choosing File | New.
-
Choose File | Import Chords from MIDI File (or press Ctrl+Option+I).
-
You'll see this Chord Wizard dialog:
68
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Press the [Open (Change)…] button, and
select the MIDI file to import.
Choose a preset, and the Chord Wizard
will interpret the chords in that style.
Press the [INTERPRET CHORDS NOW]
button to see the chords written into the
Band-in-a-Box chordsheet.
Chord Wizard results – interpreting from a Standard MIDI File.
The dialog has options to read channels into the Melody and/or Soloist tracks.
Read in Chords from a PG Music or Band-in-a-Box MIDI file.
Many of PG Music's programs have MIDI files with the chords in them. You
can open these files in Band-in-a-Box, and the chords will be imported onto the
chord sheet. To import the chords from a PG Music MIDI file (i.e. a MIDI file
made by Band-in-a-Box, PowerTracks Pro or some other PG Music programs),
choose the menu item File | Import Chords from MIDI File and select “OK to
use PG Music chord names from MIDI file.” The chords will then appear on the
lead sheet starting at bar 1, overwriting any chords that were there previously.
“Jazz Up” the Chords; “Jazz Down” the Chords.
When switching genres (from Pop to Jazz, or Jazz to Pop), it’s often necessary
to change the chords from “Pop/Rock” chords (C) to Jazz type chords (Like
CMaj7). Now you can quickly do this, by new menu options called “Jazz Up,”
“Jazz Down.” Choose the menu item User | “Jazz Up” … or User | “Jazz
Down” … to do this:
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
69
-
“Jazz Up” - This function simply converts triads to 7th chords, producing a
lead sheet more suitable for Jazz. If you have a song with triad chords like
C or Dm, you can choose to “Jazz Up” the chords. When you do this, you
get an option of whether you'd like to see Maj7, Maj6 or Dominant 7th for
the major triads.
-
“Jazz Down” - This function converts 7th chords to triads, for a lead sheet
more suited to Pop music.
Applying Styles
There are many styles available for use with the Band-in-a-Box program. For
the purposes of this program, styles refer to styles of music, i.e. Jazz Swing,
Tango, Blues, Pop Ballad, etc. Either before or after you have entered the
chords to a song, you will have to pick one of these styles. Once a style is
loaded, the song will be played back in that style.
Current Style Window
The name of the current style appears under the name of the song in the Title
window. It is also displayed under User | Current Style and information on the
current style can be viewed by selecting Style Information… from the User
menu.
The favorite styles button [F] activates a window that
keeps a list of the 150 styles you have used most
recently. (User | Open Favorite Styles... or Shift+F9
also opens this window.)
This lets you quickly load in styles that have been used your last few sessions
with Band-in-a-Box. This will likely become your preferred method of
choosing styles, since your favorites are usually near the top of the list. Click
the “Play When Chosen” checkbox to have Band-in-a-Box play your song
immediately upon selecting a style.
Tip: Click the “Play When Chosen” checkbox at the bottom of the window to have
Band-in-a-Box play your song immediately upon selection.
Types of Styles
Built-In-Styles
70
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
The first 24 styles that we made were built-in to the program, and are still
referred to as “Built-in Styles.” These styles are no longer built-in to the
program, making them editable like all other Band-in-a-Box styles.
The built-in styles may be selected from the S pull down menu. They are a
convenient way to quickly apply a basic style to a song.
User Styles
The other styles that we make are called user styles because they are editable.
The user styles may be selected,
-
by clicking on the [Style] button, or
-
from the Sty pull down menu, or
-
by selecting Load Style from Disk… from the User menu, or
-
by pressing
+u.
Holding down control or option while clicking on the style load button will
restrict the files to (A-K) or (L-Z). These instructions are given in a message if
an overflow of too many files has occurred. This works wherever you load in
styles with a File | Open type of dialog. (The StylePicker can always show
more than 685 files, so it isn't an issue there.)
Styles can also be selected by mouse clicking directly on the name of the style in
the Title window. The Choose a Style dialog box will appear.
Choose a “Built-In” style or click on the [User Song+Style] button to choose
from the file dialog.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
71
Style Aliases
Let's say you have a new style for Jazz called “Dizzy.” You can create an alias
so that when Band-in-a-Box looks for a Jazz Swing style, it will load in “Dizzy”
instead, so you don't have to change all your songs that were made with the old
style. And when you find a new favorite style, just change the alias.
Aliases are accessed by the M | Style Aliases… menu item.
To make an alias, click on the original style then select the style you would like
to substitute in its place. When you are using an alias, you will notice that there
will be a small arrowhead in the Title window on the main screen indicating that
you have an alias loaded. Aliases are stored in files called *.ALI.
Alias for ZZJAZZ.STY indicated by the > symbol.
Tip: You can temporarily totally disable the Alias feature by unchecking the “Allow
Any Style Aliases” checkbox found in the Style Aliases dialog. You can also have
confirmation of alias substitutions by checking the “Confirm Substitutions” checkbox.
Playing, Pausing, and Stopping Songs
Playing Songs
There are several ways to play a song in Band-in-a-Box, either starting from the
beginning or from a specified place in the song.
To generate a new Band-in-a-Box arrangement and play the song from the start
you can either,
72
Press the
button, or
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
+a, or
-
Press the keystrokes
-
Press the F4 function key, or
-
Select the menu command Song | Play.
To play a song in Band-in-a-Box from a particular measure,
-
Press the
or
-
With the song stopped, type the letter x on the computer keyboard to restart
from the current location of the highlight cell, or
-
Select Play From Bar # from the Song menu, or
-
Press Ctrl+f.
button and select the bar from which to play,
Double clicking on the spreadsheet or notation will start playback from that
point, without re-generating the song (unless needed due to a change in the
song).
Replay plays a song without constructing it first. To replay a song in Band-in-aBox,
button, or
-
Press the
-
Select Replay Already Constructed Song from the File menu, or
-
Press the keystrokes
-
Press the x key.
+r, or
Pausing Songs
There are several ways to pause a Band-in-a-Box song.
button.
-
Press the
-
Select Hold (Pause) from the Song menu.
-
Press the delete key.
Stopping Songs
To stop a Band-in-a-Box song;
button, or
-
Press the
-
Select the Stop option from the Song menu, or
-
Press the esc key.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
73
Changing Volume, Panning, Reverb, Chorus, Bank
To change the volume, panning, reverb, chorus, or bank of a part:
1.
Select the part by clicking on the desired part to change.
2.
Then click in the box for the desired setting to affect.
3.
Clicking on the number in the box will change the value by 1. To
increase the setting, click on the upper half of the number. Click on the
lower half of the number to decrease the setting by 1.
4.
Clicking on the gray vertical bars to the right of the box will increase or
decrease the setting by 5, except for Bank settings. Bank numbers start
at 0 and then go up by multiples of 8 (8, 16, 24, 32, etc.) until they
reach 127.
5.
The range of settings is from 0 to 127 except for Pan, which goes from
–63 (hard left) to 64 (hard right) with 0 in the center of the stereo field.
Saving Songs
Saving a Song
Once you have made a song, or have made changes to a song, you can easily
save the song by
-
Click on the
-
Press the F2 function key, or
-
Choose Save or Save song As… from the File menu, or
-
Press
button, or
+s.
Then type the filename for the song. Don't add the extension; Band-in-a-Box
adds it for you. The extension .SGU indicates a Band-in-a-Box song; the
extension .MGU indicates a Band-in-a-Box song with a melody.
Saving song with Patches…
Patches may be saved with songs. This is done by selecting the Save song with
Patches… option from the File Menu. This allows you to save the instrument
patches for each part, including the Melody, Soloist, and Harmony, in a
particular song.
74
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
If you would like to save certain patches with a song type in the number of the
instrument patch that you would like. Leave the other instruments at “0” for no
patch change.
Fill Patches
To fill the patch boxes with your current patch settings, press the [Fill Patches]
button. This saves you having to type in the patches to save with songs.
Forgot the number of the patch you wanted? No problem. Just click on the
[View Patches] button and up pops your numbered patch list.
Tip: Remember that - as with all other Band-in-a-Box patch functions - you use the
General MIDI #'s for the instrument, regardless of the synth you are using.
Example: If you want to save Clarinet Polka with a melody patch of Clarinet,
then type 72 for the melody patch. To look up the numbers of the various
instruments, click on [View Patches]. Leave the rest of the instruments at Patch
= 0 for no patch change, unless you want to specify a particular instrument.
You are also given a choice as to which instruments you would like to save
(checkbox to the left of the patch) and whether you would like to save the
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
75
Melody and Thru harmony assignments and the Soloist selected to play on the
song.
You can also save the instruments as “On” or “Off” for each song. For example,
you could have a song with no piano part. Usually, these settings are set to
“On,” as you would normally like all members of your “band” to participate.
Other parameters that may be saved (volume, reverb, etc.) are shown on the left
side of the window.
Storing Volume, Panning, Reverb and/or Bank Settings
You can optionally save these kinds of settings with your songs. You can make,
for example, a song with the piano a little quieter than usual, add reverb to the
melody patch, or pan the bass to one side, etc. Simply choose the parameters
you wish to be saved with a song and press the [Save Song] button when you are
satisfied with your selections.
Saving a MIDI file
Your song can be saved as a Standard MIDI file with the [.MID] button in the
toolbar, or with the menu command File | Save Standard MIDI File…, or with
the keystrokes Option+S. The file can be saved to disk or to the clipboard.
Choose which tracks get written to the MIDI File.
By muting tracks with Option+Click on the track name at the top of the screen,
you can decide which tracks get written to the MIDI file. Any track that is
muted is excluded from the MIDI file.
See the Edit | Preferences dialog for MIDI file options. For example, if you
don't want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 1—2—1-2-3-4
count-in you can select this option, and the MIDI file will begin directly at bar 1
without the count-in. If there is a Melody pickup, then the 2 bar lead-in will
remain in the file.
Other Edit Functions
In addition to the edit functions described elsewhere, the Edit menu has many
special options for configuring the program. These are found in the
Preferences… and Preferences 2 dialogs.
Preferences
Select Preferences from the Edit menu or press Option+P. This dialog box
allows you to set various settings. These are all saved in the Band-in-a-Box
folder in a file named Intrface.BBW.
76
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Boost Vel. of Pushes by
The pushes in Band-in-a-Box are the chords that get played before the beat.
Typically, pushes are played a little louder than other patterns. You can leave
this setting at 0, or set it to between 0 and 10.
Show Chords with push/rest chars
The push character is the caret symbol (^). So a C chord with a push is
displayed as
^C.
C.
on
The rest character is a period (.). So a C chord with a rest is displayed as
chordsheet. If you prefer to not see these characters displayed, then set this to
false. These characters won't show up on the printout regardless of this setting.
Show Rests in color
If checked, pushes are displayed in GREEN, and rests are displayed in RED.
This only applies to the Chord Sheet (not the notation)
Allow any Rests
You can disable the rests feature. You might want to do this if you've got a song
with a lot of rests in it, and are then having difficulty recording a melody
because you don't hear the drums providing the beat (due to the drums resting).
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
77
If so, you can temporarily disable the rests so that you can record and listen to
the drums.
Allow any Pushes
If for some reason you don't want a style or a song to have pushes, you can
uncheck this box.
Allow Style Pushes
If for some reason you don't want a style to have pushes, you can uncheck this
box.
Chord Display Type
This box allows for non-standard display of chords on the chordsheet area. The
options here allow for Normal (Standard Notation), Roman Numeral Notation,
Nashville Notation and Solfeggio Notation.
Allow Lead In Bars
People who use Band-in-a-Box for soloing practice will likely turn the lead-in
off to allow endless looping uninterrupted by the lead-in count.
Play Lead In even if Intro present.
If a song has an intro, it’s usually not necessary to play the 2 bar lead-in count.
There's a new option to always omit the lead-in if an intro is present. If you
would like the lead-in bars to be played even if an intro is present in the song,
set this feature to “On.”
Audible Lead In / Volume
Use these settings for the audible drum count-in. You can select any drum
instrument for the count-in. You can choose different count-in rhythms (e.g.
Tap on 2 and 4 instead of 1-2-3-4).
Smart Lead-ins can also be set here. A smart leadin avoids playing the count-in drum sound during a Melody pickup.
Metronome During Recording
Select this to hear the metronome while recording.
78
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Allow Any Endings
Song endings can be turned off for all songs, or on a song-by-song basis. To
turn song endings off for all songs uncheck the “Allow Any Endings” option.
To turn the song ending off for a single song select the Additional Song Settings
option from the Song menu and uncheck “Generate 2 Bar Ending for This
Song.”
Limit Screen size to
Use this setting to choose the size of the screen you want to display.
Menu Limit
Determines the number of items that can be listed in a menu.
OK to Load Harmony w/songs
If checked, the harmony settings for each song will be loaded and saved with
each song. If set to NO, the harmony setting won't be saved or loaded with the
songs. If you are using a certain harmony, you should set this setting to NO,
otherwise you'll have to keep re-selecting the harmony when you load in new
songs.
Change Harmony w/new chords
Example: If a harmony is played on bar 1 on a C chord, and then the note is
held as the chord changes to a Fm7 chord, ( if this setting checked ) the harmony
notes will change so that they will be still be playing chord tones. If they don't
the harmony sounds dissonant. Leave this setting checked, unless you have a
specific reason to disable it. The harmony is changed by moving the voices to
the nearest chord tone.
Har. Volume Adjust
Raise or lower the overall volume of the Harmony with a range of –128 to 128.
OK to Load Style w/songs
Leave this unchecked to audition the same style with several different songs.
Use MSB for Bank (Roland)
Band-in-a-Box sends General MIDI bank changes. These can be sent in two
ways. Most synths (e.g. Roland, Korg, and Kawai) use the Controller 0 for the
bank. This is the MSB (Most Significant Byte) method. Check this option if
you are using one of these synths. Some synths use Controller 32 for the bank
(e.g. Peavey). This is the LSB (Least Significant Byte) method. If you have
one of these synths, then uncheck the “Use MSB for Bank (Roland).”
There is also a patch change sent immediately after the bank change (when you
do bank changes from the main screen.)
Tip: If your synth requires both MSB and LSB bank changes, use the '+' button (patches on
higher banks).
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
79
Pause Play till MIDI (or key)
Allows playback to be started from another keyboard or the computer keyboard.
The Band-in-a-Box arrangement will be generated then the program will pause
until the MIDI or keystroke signal is received.
Close window when not in BB
Closes the Band-in-a-Box window when the Finder or another program is
chosen.
OMS/FreeMIDI Playback in background
(FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band-In-A-Box™ OS9, booted from
Mac Classic)
Enables OMS or FreeMIDI playback in the background.
Include Patch Changes in MIDI files
This will include the patch (instrument changes).
Include 2 bar lead-in in MIDI file
If you don't want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 1—2—12-3-4 count-in you can select this option, and the MIDI file will begin directly at
bar 1 without the count-in. If there is a Melody pickup, then the 2 bar lead-in
will remain in the file.
Include Controllers (Reverb/Chorus/pan)
This will include the reverb, chorus, and panning settings.
Include Forced Channel Meta Event
This will include the forced channel META event. It is recognized by
PowerTracks Pro Audio and other PG Music programs only.
Write Chords, Part Markers META event
Writes the chords and part markers to the MIDI file.
Include Guitar Position Controller
This will insert a controller 84 which PG Music uses to indicate the fret position.
Since some synths also use this for Portamento Control, you should use this
setting with caution.
Write Soloist Part on channel 5
Normally the program writes the Soloist part on channel 8. Since that could also
mean the left hand of a piano track using the convention of channel 8/9 for
piano, this option allows you to write it on channel 5 instead.
Write Harmony to MIDI file
If checked, the harmony will be written to the MIDI file. If not, just the melody
will be written to the MIDI file.
MIDI file Harmony sep. tracks
80
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
If checked, the harmony will be written to the MIDI file on separate tracks for
each voice. You could use this to print out individual parts to your printer for
example.
Write Guitar part on 6 channels
If set to YES, the styles that are Intelligent Guitar Styles will result in a MIDI
file that has the Guitar part written on 6 channels (11-16). When saving the file
as a MIDI file, any notes on the guitar channels (11 to 16) are preserved, so that
any fret positions are preserved. (Channels 11 to 16 correspond to strings 1 to 6,
so that a G5 note on Channel 11 would be shown on the high E string at the third
fret.)
More Preferences – Preferences 2
OK to save/load rev/vol/chorus w/songs
Offers global control over additional song settings (i.e. reverb, chorus, etc) that
can be saved and/or loaded with each song.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
81
Send GM mode at startup
For sound modules that are GM compatible, this command will ensure that the
module is ready to accept GM-specific MIDI data such as Bank, Controller, and
Patch information.
Send GS Mode On at startup
For sound modules that are GS compatible, this command will ensure that the
module is ready to accept GS-specific MIDI data such as Bank, Controller, and
Patch information.
Note: Many newer modules/keyboards made by Roland and others can take
advantage of the extra parameters and features found in the GS mode. We
recommend using this mode rather than the GM mode if your synth supports it.
Similarly, many newer Yamaha modules/keyboards support the XG specification. If
your synth supports this mode, we recommend using it in order to access more
parameters and patches than the GM standard provides. Some Yamaha XG
modules/keyboards can also be set to work in GS mode, if desired.
Send XG Mode On at startup
For sound modules that are XG compatible, this command will ensure that the
module is ready to accept XG-specific MIDI data such as Bank, Controller, and
Patch information.
Turn External Keyboard’s Local On at end of session
Normally while using Band-in-a-Box the “local-off” setting for your MIDI
keyboard is best, since the THRU part will be coming from Band-in-a-Box and
you don't want to hear your MIDI keyboard doubling the notes that are being
played. However, when you exit Band-in-a-Box, you might want the “local on”
setting for your synthesizer turned back on. This option defaults to true.
OK to beep with messages
Now that computers have better speaker systems, a simple “beep” when an
incorrect key is pressed can seem loud enough to “wake your neighbors.”
Setting the “silent beep” option allows Band-in-a-Box to visually flash the
window title bar to get your attention, instead of generating an audible “beep.”
OK to prompt to reduce/expand
If a style is changed with a different feel (16th notes instead of 8th notes), Bandin-a-Box will automatically offer to expand or reduce the duration of the chords,
and change the tempo to accommodate the new style. This also works as the
song is playing.
Lowest Bass Note (E2 = default)
Styles will normally play bass notes (down to the low E) if the pattern won't go
below a low E. This happens with all styles automatically, but there is also an
option to set the lowest bass note real low so you can get a low C if you want to!
My soundcard or MIDI doesn't have brushes – remap them
82
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Most GM modules have brushes available on patch 41 on the drums. On some,
you need to load a GS sound font for this to occur. On the Yamaha XG, you
likely need to send a “GS mode on” message from the GM menu in Band-in-aBox. But if your module just doesn't have brushes available, then you can set
this option, and the style will remap the notes to different drum instruments that
don't have brushes.
For Roman Numerals in minor keys, use relative major
Option for minor keys base roman numerals on the relative major.
For example in key of Am, Am is either the Im chord or the VIm chord.
Save Button on main screen works as Save As
The [Save] button will launch the file dialog where the location and name of the
file being saved can be changed.
Name MIDI files with .MID extension
This will append the file extension .MID to MIDI files saved in Band-in-a-Box,
rather than prefacing them with SMF (Standard MIDI File).
Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet
Display larger fonts, particularly with higher screen resolution.
Color for Chordsheet Area
Make your choice from a list of colors for the chordsheet area. The keystrokes
Ctrl+Shift+C will toggle through the colors from the main screen without
opening the Preferences 2 dialog.
Soloist Prefs…
Set the “Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard” to “true” if you want MIDI
velocity information sent to the Soloing Wizard. If you have a velocity sensitive
MIDI device attached to your computer and you want to control the dynamics of
the Soloist, you should enable this feature.
Set the “Trigger Playback Early” to “true” to enable song playback to start
before the Soloist has actually completed composing a solo. Setting this setting
to “false” (disabled) will instruct Band-in-a-Box to completely compose a solo
before song playback begins.
Set the “Soloist –Prefer Long phrases” checkbox to “true” (enabled) if you
would like the Soloist to use the longest musical phrases it knows. (Note: this
option may also increase Soloist creation times. Disable this feature if you are
using a slower or low-memory equipped computer.)
The “Soloist/Melodist Velocity Adjust” box allows you to quickly boost or
reduce the volume of the Soloist or Melodist part relative to the other instrument
parts. For a realistic mix, they are set slightly louder than the other instrument
parts in a song. The default is 5.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
83
Shrink/Expand
The Shrink command will reduce durations of chords by ½ (e.g.,
4beats>>2beats, 2beats>>1beat). Expand doubles the durations of chords (e.g.,
1beat>>2beats, 2beats>>4beats).
Unfold (convert to 1 big chorus)
If you have a song with 3 choruses, and want to convert it to a single large
chorus, this command “unfolds” the song into just that; one BIG chorus. This is
useful for customizing a song.
When selected, Band-in-a-Box will display all choruses and verses of a song
without loops or repeats. This is a useful command if you wish to make use of
the Patch/Harmony change at any bar feature, or if you are going to generate a
MIDI file for use with a sequencer or sequencing program.
Slide Tracks
This allows you to move any of the bass, drums, piano, guitar, strings, melody
or the soloist track ahead or behind by a certain amount. Setting these numbers
will slide the entire track ahead or behind by the # of ticks (120 ticks per beat).
You could, for example, slide the bass track so it plays a little ahead of the rest
of the band. This has the effect of making the bass player “drive the band” and
is useful in Jazz styles to make the music sound more exciting.
Allow Any Slides
If you want the slides to occur, then check this box.
Humanize Slides
If this box is checked, the slides will be randomized to slide the track a different
amount for each note. The amount varies from 0 ticks to the slide setting for the
instrument. A track that always plays notes early by a certain amount tends to
sound out of time, whereas randomizing the slide makes the track sounds more
human.
Song Memo…
A song memo of up to 2000 characters may be added. Clicking on the [memo]
button located to the right of the song title launches the Song Memo dialog
where you can type in a short memo about the song, style, etc. The keystrokes
Option+M will also launch the Song Memo.
Enter/Copy/Move Lyrics
These features enable the typing, editing, and exporting of song lyrics.
84
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Edit Chord Shortcut.txt
This will edit the file SHORTCUT.TXT using Teach Text. This is the chord
shortcuts file. Make sure to save the file after editing. Changes won’t take
effect until you choose Edit | Refresh Chord Shortcuts.
If you find a chord that Band-in-a-Box won't accept like Csus2, when it expects
C2 instead, you can enter this on a single line (without the quotes) “[email protected]”
Then Band-in-a-Box will enter the chord C2 if you type in Csus2. These allow
someone to type in Csus2 and the program will accept it. You can also use it for
shortcuts, like if you entered [email protected], Band-in-a-Box would let you type Cj for
CMaj7. See the file pgshortc.txt in the Band-in-a-Box folder for examples of
shortcuts.
Refresh Chord Shortcuts
After editing chord shortcuts in the SHORTCUT.TXT file you must use this
command to save the changes.
MIDI Setup
Connecting to MIDI
Here is an illustration of the connections for a MIDI system using a MIDI
Interface to connect to an external MIDI synthesizer.
-
The Band-in-a-Box program running on your computer sends a stream of
MIDI data via the MIDI Driver to your MIDI interface.
-
The MIDI interface transmits information between the computer and your
synthesizer.
-
The Synthesizer or Sound Module (e.g. Roland Sound Canvas) produces
the musical instrument sounds. Band-in-a-Box tells it what notes to play
and how to play them.
-
Stereo Speakers or Headphones are connected to your synthesizer so that
you may hear the music.
Your MIDI setup could also be configured to use the built-in sounds of
QuickTime Musical Instruments, or a virtual software synthesizer such as the
Roland VSC Virtual Sound Canvas.
There are also MIDI systems such as OMS and FreeMIDI that can be configured
by the user. (FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band-In-A-Box™ OS9,
booted from Mac Classic) If they are present on your system, they will appear
in the Band-in-a-Box MIDI Drivers dialog.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
85
Selecting a MIDI Driver
To select a MIDI driver go to M | Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime… to open
the MIDI Drivers dialog.
Choose the MIDI driver that you want to use, then click on [OK] to close the
dialog.
MIDI Settings
The MIDI Settings dialog box lets you make settings for each part
(bass/drums/piano etc.) and also to set the Harmony channels.
86
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
CHANNELS: Range 0 to 16. (If set to 0, part will be Off).
Some synths (e.g. MT32), give higher priority to lower channel #'s, so if you
are “running out of notes” you should assign important parts (e.g. Melody) a
lower channel than other parts (e.g. Guitar)
OCTAVE: This adjusts the octave of the part. Range is -2 to +2, usually set to
0. (Bass is usually set to -1 for General MIDI instruments.)
PATCH: Range 0 to 127. These are General MIDI patch numbers. You do not
type in the patch numbers of your synthesizer. (The patch map handles mapping
of the General MIDI patch numbers to your non-GM synthesizer's patch
numbers.)
VOLUME: Range 0 to 127. Typical volume setting is = 90.
REVERB: Range 0 to 127. Typical setting = 40.
CHORUS: Range of 0 to 127. Typical setting = 0.
PAN: Panning refers to the left/right stereo placement. Range is –63 (hard left)
to +64 (hard right). A setting of 0 is centered.
Piano Display:
Default =
Uncheck this box if you don’t want to see notes played on the onscreen piano
keyboard.
Color Notes?
Default =
The notes that play on the onscreen piano are usually in different colors for each
part. Bass – Aqua, Piano – Blue, Guitar – Green letter G, Strings – Pink letter S,
Melody – Red letter M, Solo – Red letter S. Uncheck this box to show them all
in black and white.
Allow Patch Changes:
Default =
Do not check this box if you want to disable All Patch changes. If you haven't
made a patch map you should disable this.
Style GS Patch Changes:
Default =
Styles frequently come with patch changes. If you want to disable these,
uncheck this box.
MIDI (sync):
Default =
To synchronize Band-in-a-Box with an external sequencer, check this box.
Overall Volume Changes:
Default =
To prevent any changes of volume inside Band-in-a-Box, uncheck this box.
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
87
Style Volume Changes:
Default =
Styles occasionally come with volume changes. To prevent these, uncheck this
box.
Extra Note Offs:
Default =
Leave this box unchecked unless you are having trouble with stuck notes when
you press [Stop]. If you check this box, Band-in-a-Box will send a sweep of all
notes off.
Concert Pitch Adjust:
Default = 0
This is useful for non-concert instruments such as Saxophone or Trumpet. The
output is transposed so that you see the music in one key, and it plays in another.
Trumpet players and other Bb instruments should set Concert Pitch Adjust to -2
(i.e. minus 2). Alto Sax and other Eb instruments should set Concert Pitch
Adjust to +3.
Here's an example of an Alto player using Band-in-a-Box by setting the
concert pitch adjust to +3.
If the song is in the concert key of C transpose the song to A using the key
signature box on the main screen. The song will display in the key of A, but
with the Concert Pitch Adjust set to +3 it will play 3 semitones higher, in the
key of C. So the Alto player can read the music in the transposed key while
hearing it in the concert key. The song can also be printed out in the key of A.
The [View GS Map] button opens a list of
General MIDI patch numbers for quick
reference.
Press the [Harmony..] button to launch the
Harmony Channels dialog box.
88
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Setting the Harmony Channels
Melody Harmony Channel A
Always uses the Melody channel
Melody Harmony Channel B
Default =11
Melody Harmony Channel C
Default =12
Thru Harmony Channel A
Always uses the Thru channel
Thru Harmony Channel B
Default =13
Thru Harmony Channel C
Default =14
Band-in-a-Box already uses 7 channels (Bass, Drums, Piano, Guitar, Strings,
Melody and Thru channels). Adding these 4 harmony channels produces
potentially 11 channels of information. If you have a modern module that
receives on all channels, then you can use these defaults.
Older modules capable of playing only 8 parts at once (like an MT32 or a Korg
M1) won't be able to take advantage of the harmony using different instruments.
In this case you should set the harmony channels as follows:
Melody Harmony Channel A
Uses the Melody Channel, no need to set.
Melody Harmony Channel B
Need to Set equal to Melody Channel.
Melody Harmony Channel C
Need to Set equal to Melody Channel
Thru Harmony Channel A
Uses the Thru Channel, no need to set.
Thru Harmony Channel B
Need to Set equal to Thru Channel.
Thru Harmony Channel C
Need to Set equal to Thru Channel.
If you do this, then you don't need to do any other modifications to your Bandin-a-Box setup, because it is not using any new channels.
MIDI Output to an external device.
Some external music hardware devices require chords played in root position to
drive them in real time.
An example of this is the Digitech Vocalist. It will let you sing into a
microphone and harmonize your voice according to the chords that are input to
the device. Band-in-a-Box now has the capability of outputting a separate
channel with the chords in root position to support such external devices
automatically. There are also settings such as complexity of chords, output
channel, velocity, and note range. Band-in-a-Box will also drive “RealTime
Arrangers” like the Roland RA series.
The best way to accomplish this is to access the M | Output chords to external
device… menu item. You will then be given a window like the following:
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
89
Click on the [Vocalist] button if you have such a device connected to your MIDI
system. Band-in-a-Box will then send it the appropriate chord information
automatically as your song is playing (e.g., root position triads).
Then you can sing along to any Band-in-a-Box file and the Vocalist will
harmonize your voice according to the root position chords that Band-in-a-Box
is sending to it.
For any other devices, you will need to know a little more information as to
what your external device needs to “see” for it to function correctly, such as
channel, velocity, chord type, etc. Then type the appropriate values in the
spaces provided in the Output Chords To External Device window (shown
above).
The JukeBox
Overview of the Jukebox
The Jukebox will Load and Play an entire folder of songs. Songs play
continuously, one after the other. The Jukebox will continue to play while you
move to other programs, so you can use the Jukebox to provide background
music for your Macintosh!
Press the
button, the J keys, or choose Juke Box Play from the Song
menu to open the Juke Box Options dialog.
90
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Make your choices of options as described below, and then click on the [Play
Juke Box] button to start the Jukebox playing.
Press the and arrows onscreen, or the [ or ] keys to select the
“Previous Juke Song” or the “Next Juke Song” respectively, or choose these
options from the Song menu.
Jukebox Options
Include Songs without Melodies: If checked, the program plays songs with
and without melodies - that is songs within the Songs folder. If not checked, the
Jukebox will include only songs with the MG? extension.
Audible lead-in: While listening to the Jukebox, you might not want to hear
the count-in click. If not checked, you won't hear the count-in click.
Vary Melody Instrument: Hearing a song after a song is played with the same
melody instrument would get a little monotonous. If you check this option, the
program will randomly change the melody instrument between your favorites.
Use Tap in click to start: This option is used to control when the next song
starts and allows you to control the tempo of the song. See options below “Set
Cue/Tap Options.”
Hide Song Name: This feature is used to play the “Guess the Song” game.
When checked, the titles are hidden until you click the title. When someone
guesses the Song Title, you can click in the Title box to verify if he/she is
correct. You'll probably want to restrict the Jukebox to only songs with
melodies unless you can guess songs without melodies!!
Random Play/Alphabetical: If set to “Random” the songs will be played in
random order (without repeating songs). If set to “Alphabetical” the songs will
be played in alphabetical order from the Songs folder.
Change Harmony w/each song: If selected a harmony will be automatically
selected for each song that plays in the Jukebox. Use the “Harmony # range”
settings to choose from a particular section of the Harmony list.
Generate Solos: Set this option to “On” to permit the Soloist to play a solo
over all the songs selected for Jukebox playback.
Tip: We have created a special Jukebox directory of songs that showcase the many
Soloists available. Take a moment to hear this showcase by following these steps:
-
Change to this directory by loading/opening a song from the SOLODEMO folder, but
instead of playing the song you have loaded press the [Juke] button.
-
Ensure that the “Generate Solos” checkbox is set selected (checked). If you enable
“Auto-Choose Soloists” the program will select an appropriate Soloist for each
Jukebox song. “Change Soloist w/each chorus” instructs the program to choose
different Soloists for each chorus of a song. For example, if Band-in-a-Box
encounters a three chorus Jazz tune during jukebox playback, the program might
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
91
choose a Saxophone solo for the first chorus, a Trumpet for the next, and a Guitar or
Piano for the last chorus.
-
When you select [Play Juke Box] the Select Soloist dialog will pop up with a
suggestion to use a Soloist for the first song in the jukebox list. This is normal. Press
[OK] to accept the Soloist suggestion. (The Jukebox will not bother you with the
Select Soloist dialog again; it will simply choose an appropriate Soloist for any given
song in the Jukebox song list.)
(Preview) Switch to next song after ____ Bars
Use this setting to preview the songs in a Jukebox list. Band-in-a-Box will play
each song in the folder for the number of bars you enter into the box. Use a
setting of 99 bars to play one chorus of each song.
Set Cue/Tap Options: The Cue Song Setup dialog has two parts. One part
defines the Tap Input device, the other part determines whether you would like
the Tap Input device to just “Start” the song or if you would like it to “SET
TEMPO/ START song.”
Accept Tap Input From options:
SPACEBAR: If this option is checked, your computer keyboard's [Spacebar]
would be used as the Tap Input device.
MIDI Keyboard: If this option is checked, your MIDI Keyboard would be
used as the Tap Input Device. The other options here allow you to select a
channel and a MIDI note number as the key to start the song. (This is usually
defined as the Rim Shot note number.)
Mouse click: If this option is checked, your Mouse will be used as the Tap Input
Device.
Any MIDI Event: If this option is checked, any MIDI Event will be used as the
Tap Input Device, i.e. Keyboard Metronome, pressing a key on your MIDI
Keyboard.
Start Song/Start Song and Set Tempo:
Tap ONCE to START song: If this option is checked, the song will start after
one tap from the selected Tap Input Device.
Tap 4 x's to SET TEMPO/ START song: If this option is checked the song
will start after tapping 4 times on the selected Tap Input Device. The Tempo
will be set automatically according to your tapped in value.
92
Chapter 6: Band-in-a-Box PowerGuide
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
Notation
Opening and Closing the Notation Window
To get to the Notation inside Band-in-a-Box you need to
open the Notation window. You can do this by pressing
the [Notation] button. You can also open the Notation window from the menu
(File | Notation Window) or by pressing +w. The Notation window covers
the previous window (the chordsheet) and is fixed (not movable). Close the
Notation window by pressing the [Notation] button again.
Notation Window Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of the Notation Window gives you access to most of the
functions.
Options
The options button launches the Notation Windows Settings
dialog, where notation display options are set.
Notation Mode
This is an important button. It is the Notation Mode button. This
toggles between the 3 modes of the Notation window, Standard
Notation mode, Editable Notation mode, and Staff Roll mode. You can toggle
through the 3 modes by clicking the mouse on the button.
Print Options
Press this button to Print the Notation to any standard
printer supported by the Macintosh. (If you haven't set up
your printer to work with any other MAC programs, then you'll need to select a
printer in the Chooser.) This launches a dialog box that lets you set options for
printing. These are described elsewhere.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
93
Current Note
This box displays the name of the note that the mouse is currently
over. This is helpful to know what note will be inserted when you
click to insert a note.
Note or Rest Checkbox
These determine whether a Note or a Rest will
be inserted when a mouse is clicked.
Mono Mode
When this checkbox is selected, the notation is entered as
monophonic (one note only). This is useful for melodies that
only have one note playing at a time. Mono mode is a faster way to enter notes,
because the Notation Window will automatically delete a note that is present at
the same location that you are putting a new note on. So if you have mistakenly
put a B note on as a C, you just click on the B note, and if in mono mode the C
will be deleted automatically.
“Clean” Notation
When music has been played in from a MIDI keyboard, there
are frequently effects like grace notes, glitches, and notes
played off time. The Clean Notation mode is an intelligent feature that “Cleans
Up The Notation” for you. It does this by eliminating the display of grace notes
and glitches, and also simplifies the Notation display so it is more readable.
Clean Notation doesn't affect the actual content of the track, just how it is
displayed. In general, this should be on, since it improves the display. But if
you want to see every grace note or glitch that was played, then turn it off.
Looping the Notation Screen
While a song is playing, click the “L. Scr” checkbox and the
song will loop for the 4 bars shown on the notation screen.
For example, if you let the soloist create a great sounding Jazz solo, you can
then look at the notation and sight read along with the solo. When you reach a
particularly interesting or difficult part that you would like to practice, set the L.
Scr to “On” and it will loop that 4 bar phrase.
Tip: Since you might be holding your guitar or sax as you try to play with this
command, we've made some easy hot keys to navigate around. The “NUMPAD 1”
key turns the Looping on or off. The Cursor Up / Down keys jump to the previous /
next screen.
The Track Buttons
These stand for Bass,
Drums, Piano, Guitar,
Strings, Melody, and Solo. Normally you will be displaying the Melody or Solo
track, but you can display or print any track from Band-in-a-Box. The Soloist
94
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
allows you to read along with the solo, or print a hard copy. Why not mute the
Soloist track and play the Solo yourself. Just press the button to change the
track. You may do this while the song is playing.
Note: The instrument tracks are not created by Band-in-a-Box until you press
[Play], so you may notice that the track is blank (or shows a previous song) until
the song has been played once!
Exploring the Notation
Current Time position.
This vertical line, called the time bar, indicates the current time position. You
can click anywhere on the Current Time line to set a new position. This is
useful to set a different location to type in chords, or to play from a different
location.
The clef is displayed, and the key signature of the song. If you
want some extra space for the notation, you can press the options
button and set “Show Key Signature” to “No,” and this key
signature won't be displayed.
Setting the Key Signature.
The key signature of the song is set by the Key Signature area, which is outside
the Notation window and is under the Title of the song. You'll get a popup
menu that allows you to choose a key, and optionally transpose the song.
Typing chords in Notation.
Chords can be typed in the Notation window and entered at the current position
of the time bar. The chords that are typed in the Notation window will also
show up on the chordsheet.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
95
As you can see, the Notation window contains the notes and chords of the song.
The bar numbers are also present, with the chorus number in brackets ( ). If
there is a part marker present at the bar, the bar number will be displayed in
blue, and there will be a letter “a” or “b” indicating the part marker.
Notation Modes
There are 3 modes to the Notation window,
1. Notation Mode
To display or print notation.
2. Editable Notation Mode
To enter or edit notation.
3. Staff Roll Mode
To enter/edit notation in Staff Roll format.
You can toggle between each of the modes by pressing the Notation
Mode button on the Notation toolbar. Shift click on the [N] button will
back up one notation mode.
Standard Notation Window
The Standard Notation window is for display, entry of melodies and chords (or
any track). You see the melody/ chords on screen just as you would in a lead
sheet. You can even display the Bass, Drums, Guitar, Piano, or Strings tracks in
notation. Handles Jazz eighth notes and triplet figures correctly. Automatic
options like “auto durations,” “clean notation,” “mono display,” “minimize
rests,” and “engraver spacing” produce very musical and readable notation.
Notes can be entered in step time (clicking with the mouse on the staff, or on the
onscreen piano), or in real time from a MIDI keyboard.
Editable Notation Mode
This allows you to enter or edit notation. Usually, the Melody and Soloist tracks
are the only ones you'll want to edit.
Note: Although you could edit the other tracks (e.g., Bass track), your edits would
be lost when the song is re-composed when you press [Play] - unless you make a
MIDI file to save it first.
96
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
You will notice the grid of vertical lines that indicates where the notes will be
placed. This song is in Jazz Swing, so Band-in-a-Box has automatically set the
grid resolution to swing triplets, 3 grid lines per beat. This resolution can be
changed in the Notation Window Settings dialog, but Band-in-a-Box should set
it to the correct value, based upon the style that is currently in use. For example,
when a style is a Bossa Nova the division will be sixteenth notes, since Bossa
Nova is an even rhythm, not a triplet feel rhythm.
To insert a new note.
Move the mouse to the location that you want. If you want Beat 1, move to the
first dotted line in the bar. Click on the staff over the note that you want.
The Current Note box in the toolbar will give you the name of the
note that you're on. Click with the mouse button to insert the note.
-
To insert a SHARP hold down the SHIFT key as you click the note.
-
To insert a FLAT hold down the CONTROL key as you click the note.
-
To insert a NATURAL hold down the
key as you click the note.
How long does the note last that I insert?
Band-in-a-Box uses an intelligent auto-duration feature to determine how long
the note should be. A note that is put in will initially have a duration of 2 bars (2
whole notes). When the next note is put in (say 2 beats later), Band-in-a-Box
will shorten the duration of the previous note to just shorter than 2 beats. This
means that you don't have to worry about durations at all, and can just click on
the notes that you want, at the locations that you want.
If you want a specific duration (i.e., over-ride the auto duration), you can do this
by editing the note using by clicking on the note while holding down the option
key, and then you're in a dialog box that allows you to type the exact duration
that you want.
The purpose of auto-durations is to allow you to enter a lead sheet style melody
by clicking only once per note, dramatically speeding up the entry of notation.
Inserting Rests.
You can Insert a REST by clicking the Rest button, and then
clicking at the location you would like the rest to be inserted at.
This automatically chops off the duration of the previous note.
Note: Band-in-a-Box dislikes rests less than a quarter note, so if it is important to
you to see rests less than a quarter note, make sure to de-select the “Minimize
Rests” check box in the Notation Window Settings dialog box.
Notes can be moved via drag and drop. To move a note, place the mouse cursor
over an existing note and then click and hold the mouse button down. While
keeping the mouse button pressed, move the mouse cursor over to the location
you wish to drop the note and then let go of the mouse button. The note will be
moved to the place you dropped it.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
97
Certain areas of the screen are not valid locations to drop a note. The mouse
cursor will change to a busy cursor to indicate an invalid location. If you try to
drop a note in an invalid location, nothing will happen.
Moving a note in time.
If you want to change the start time of a note, drag the note with the left mouse
button to the new location. This is a simple way to move the note.
Alternatively, you could edit the note numerically with an option click on the
note.
Changing the pitch of a note.
Similarly, you can drag the note vertically to change the note value, and release
it when you're on the note you want. Hold down the shift, control, or
key to
have the note inserted as a sharp, flat, or natural respectively.
Editing a note's values.
Click on a note while holding the option key. This brings up the Note Edit
dialog box that lets you change any values about the note in numerical data.
Staff Roll Notation Mode
Click on the Notation Mode button again to enter Staff Roll mode. It
will look like this.
98
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
This mode is similar to the Editable Notation mode, except the beats begin right
on the bar line. You can also see the durations of the notes visually, represented
by horizontal blue lines. Similarly, you can see the velocities of the notes
displayed as vertical blue lines.
Note: If you can't see these lines press the [Opt.] button to ensure that you have
set the “Show Bar/Beat Lines,” “Show Note Durations,” and “Show Velocity Lines”
to “Yes.”
This mode works like the Editable Notation - you mouse click to insert a note,
and can drag notes horizontally or vertically, and edit notes by pressing the
Mouse while holding the option key.
Option key mouse drag of velocity or duration.
There is an additional function available in this mode: Option+Mouse Drag.
Hold down the option key, then place the mouse cursor on the note head and
drag it horizontally to the right to set the note's duration. Use the same
procedure to set velocity, but drag the mouse vertically from the note head.
Notation Window Settings Dialog Box
Resolution Setting
Band-in-a-Box automatically sets the resolution whenever a Style is loaded. If a
style has a triplet feel (such as Jazz Swing or a Shuffle style), then Band-in-aBox will set the resolution to “3 (swing).” This will ensure that Jazz eighth
notes (swing triplets) are handled correctly. When a “straight” style like Bossa
Nova is loaded in, Band-in-a-Box will change the resolution to sixteenths notes.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
99
This will provide even eight notes. You shouldn't have to change this setting
very often, as Band-in-a-Box sets it for you.
The “Resolution” setting determines how the program rounds the note times and
durations when translating a track into standard notation. For example, a
resolution of 4 will cause the program to round each note and duration to the
nearest 16th note when displaying the music (in 4/4 time). A resolution of 3 will
cause Band-in-a-Box to round each note to the nearest 8th note triplet (in 4/4
time). A resolution of 2 will cause BB to round each note to the nearest 8th note
(in 4/4 time).
Tip: If you're displaying Jazz Swing or Shuffle music that has a triplet feel to the
eighth notes, make sure to set the resolution to = 3(swing). This will display the 8th
notes and other aspects of Jazz Swing music correctly.
Transpose
The Transpose setting lets you adjust the Notation window to display notes
either higher or lower than their actual pitches. For example, if you're working
with guitar music, you could set this to +12 and the guitar music will be
displayed an octave higher, which is the way guitar music is normally notated.
Chord Vert. Pos
The chord vertical position affects the printout, not the display, it controls how
high the chords will be printed above the staff. If set to =5, the chords will be
written 5 notes above the top of the Staff (i.e. 5 notes above the F - at high D).
If your piece contains a lot of high notes, then set the chord position to a high
setting. If you're using a big font (e.g. 32 point music font size), you should set
the chord height to a low value (1 or 2) so it won't be too high and encroach on
the staff above.
Default =5
Range 1 to 10
Show Key Signature
If turned off, you won't have the key signature box displayed on the Notation
screen, which will save some space on the screen. Usually set it to true.
Show Bar/Beats/Lines, Show Note Durations, Show Velocity Lines
These options are for the Staff Roll mode, and determine which lines will show
up. Normally you'll want all of them displayed.
100
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics
Band-in-a-Box ill automatically use the chord tones (1, 3, 5 and 7) in choosing
its enharmonics. If “Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics” is checked, Band-in-aBox will also use the enharmonics for the passing tones of the chord scale.
Enharmonics for Chord Tones are automatically based on the chord, as shown.
For example, on an F#7 chord in the key of Eb, the Ab note is part of the F#7
scale (as a G#, the 2nd of the scale), but is also part of the Eb key of the song. If
you want to display based on the chord scale, setting “Use Chord Scale for
Enharmonics” will display the note as a G# instead of Ab.
Enharmonics for passing tones are based on the chord if we “Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics.”
Intelligent accidentals (chord context)
The sharps and flats that Band-in-a-Box uses on the melody notes are also
context sensitive to the chord names. For example, if you are in the key of Eb,
and the chord is an E7, a G# note will show up as a G#, and not an Ab. This
means that the notation accidentals will automatically show up correctly.
Scroll Ahead by
The “Scroll Ahead by” option can be set to none, 1 bar, or 2 bars. This is useful
if you are reading the music from the Notation as it is scrolling. Since musicians
read ahead of the music, it is helpful for the music to scroll ahead. So when the
playback is on bar 4, you'll also see bar 5 of the next screen displayed. This
feature still shows you the current bar when it is scrolling ahead, so it is useful
even if you don't read ahead.
Tick Offset
The “Tick Offset” on the notation options is one of the keys to great looking
notation. It accounts for playing that is before or behind the beat. The track is
automatically scanned to determine the tick offset so that you don't have to set
this yourself. This results in better looking notation.
You may change this setting, but normally Band-in-a-Box will determine the
best tick offset automatically.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
101
Tip: The notation of Jazz Swing music will often be improved by a Tick Offset
setting of about minus 5. This is because Jazz music is typically played a little after
the beat or, in Jazz terms, “laid back.”
Minimize Rests
The “Minimize Rests” checkbox, when checked, will cause Band-in-a-Box to
display the music with minimal rests. Use this setting if notes are displayed as
shorter than you intended. For example, if eighth notes are displayed as
sixteenth notes because you recorded them staccato.
Engraver Spacing
This is an intelligent option that spaces the Notation to avoid overlapping
notation, and accounts for space required by accidentals, rests etc. It should
normally be set to “On.” The only reason to set it to “Off” would be to speed up
the Notation redraws, but then you will see a mathematical spacing, which
results in overlapped notes in some situations. It is only operative in (noneditable) Notation mode.
Clefs Split at
The “Clefs Split” at setting determines the split point for placing notes on the
Bass or Treble clef. The default setting is C5, which is middle C. For example,
you can use a higher split point, such as C6 if you want some notes up to a G
above middle C to be displayed on the bass clef with ledger lines instead of on
the treble clef. If the split point is above middle C, and a note in the music is
high enough that any of the ledger lines above the bass clef would overwrite the
treble clef, the note will be placed on the treble clef.
Inserted Note Defaults
-
If the Snap to Grid Lines checkbox is checked, the inserted note will be
lined up with the closest grid line (quantized). So you don't have to click
exactly on the beat to have the note inserted exactly on the beat.
-
Duration % is the duration that will be assigned. For example, if a whole
note is inserted with a duration of 80%, the note would last 4*80% = 3.2
beats.
-
The Channel # and Velocity settings determine the MIDI channel and
velocity of inserted notes.
Play Inserted Notes
If the “Play Inserted Notes” checkbox is checked, notes that you insert will
sound briefly as they are inserted. This lets you hear that the note you inserted
sounds correct.
Entering Chords Using the Notation Window
This is identical to the operation of the chordsheet. You use the Current Time
Indicator (time bar) to see where you are in the bar. Then type in the chords as
you do in Band-in-a-Box.
102
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
To type the Ab that you see here, type Ab. Then to move to the Gb7 that is on
beat 3, press the RIGHT CURSOR Key. To enter an Ab chord on beat 1 and a
Db7 beat 2, type Ab,Db7 (i.e. 2 chords separated by a comma ).
Note: You can also use Option+Z or select Chord Settings option from the Edit
menu to enter chords. This pops up a dialog box that lets you type in the chords,
and also sets options like pushes, rests, and shots.
Convert Harmony Part to Notation track.
Previously if you added a harmony the harmony parts wouldn't be seen on the
notation, you would only see the lead part. Now you can write the harmony part
directly to the notation track, so you can see it and print it out, just like any other
part.
Note: These features are all described for the Melody track, but apply equally to the
Soloist (or THRU) part.
To convert a melody (or Soloist) track to a Harmony, do the following:
Select the
1.
Harmony that you want to use.
2.
Choose the menu item MEL | Convert Harmony to Melody Track.
3.
Your harmony will now be written to the track, and you'll get a
confirmation dialog.
The harmony may be removed
from the track at any time,
even after you've saved and reloaded the song. This is done
from the menu item MEL |
Remove Harmony (or guitar
solo) from Melody Track.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
103
Printing
Lead Sheet Style Printing
Your created songs can be printed out in the style of a lead sheet style. Most
songs will fit on 1 page, so your printout will look similar to a standard lead
sheet. You can easily make and printout a custom fake book of all of your
tunes, and you can easily transpose parts to print out for trumpet /sax players etc.
The printout includes title, bar #s, composer, style, and copyright information.
Prints using a scaleable True Type font and supports all MAC compatible
printers.
A lead sheet usually contains the chords, melody, and lyrics of a song, on a
single page if possible. We have kept the concept of Band-in-a-Box using 4
bars per line on the printout since Pop music is usually in 4 bar phrases. This
aligns these phrases on the beginning of a new line.
In addition to a lead sheet style printout, you can also print out any part of Bandin-a-Box, such as the Piano part, or Guitar part, to practice your sight reading, or
to learn the parts if you are learning to play that instrument.
Printing a song is done by pressing the Print button. This launches the
Print Options dialog box that lets you view the current settings, and
then press the [OK – Print] button.
Print out any combination of Chords, Notes, Lyrics, (or blank paper)!
You'll need to choose what to print out (notes /chords / lyrics / bar numbers),
and what clefs to include (treble / bass). You can print out the first chorus, last
chorus or the whole song. Margins are available, so you can make a left margin
to produce a printout to go into a 3-hole binder for example.
Auto-Fit onto 1 page
Band-in-a-Box will set the # staves per page for you. This will be set when you
enter the Print Dialog box, or change the range that you want to print (first /last
chorus or whole song). This will be done to try to fit your printing onto 1 page.
If you're printing the whole song, it is unlikely that it will fit onto 1 page, so
Band-in-a-Box will set to the default 10 staves per page. You can over-ride this
setting by typing in the # staves per page that you would like.
Note: Remember that the title on page 1 takes up 1 stave, so if you choose 10
staves, you will get the title + 9 staves on page 1, and 10 staves on page 2.
104
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
Print Options Dialog Box
Include Chords. If selected, this will include the chords of the song on the lead
sheet. Remember that you can set the height of the chords relative to the staff in
the Notation Window Settings dialog box.
Include Notes. If you want only a chord lead sheet with no notes, then turn this
off. Otherwise it should be true.
Bar #s below by. Sets the position of the bar numbers below the staff. The
range from highest to lowest position is 1 to 7.
Lyrics. Lyrics can either be printed above the chords, below the staff, or not
printed at all. Normally lyrics are printed below the staff.
Lyrics Below By. Positions the lyrics below the staff, with settings from 1
(highest) to 7 (lowest).
Treble Clef. Normally you will want to include the treble clef. If you're
printing out the Bass part, you probably don't want the treble clef.
Bass Clef. For Melodies, you likely won't want the bass clef printed. For other
parts (Piano, Bass) you will want the bass clef printed.
Clef split at. This determines where the notation will split the treble and bass
clefs. Middle C is C5.
Key Signature Every Line. Default = NO
Most modern fake books don't include the key signature every line. If you
would like this to happen, then select this.
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
105
Print Range (First Chorus / Last Chorus / Whole Song). You can either print
the First Chorus, Last Chorus, or the Whole Song. When you change this
setting, Band-in-a-Box will reset to auto-fit the printout to one page if possible.
Normally, you'll want to print the first chorus of the song.
You'll want to print the last chorus in a song that has a tag ending, or a song that
you want to see the 2 bar ending printed.
The whole song could be printed if you've played differently for each chorus.
Use the Edit | Unfold (Convert to 1 big chorus) option to make each chorus
different.
Include Lead In Bar. If your song has a lead-in (pickup) to bar 1, then make
sure you've checked the lead-in. Actually, Band-in-a-Box has set this for you by
determining if there are any notes in the lead-in measure. You can over-ride this
automatic setting, if necessary.
Staves per page. This determines how many staves will be shown per page.
The title takes up 1 stave on page 1, so that if you set the # staves to =10, you
will get 9 staves + the title on page 1 and 10 staves on page 2, 3 etc.
Title / Style / Composer / Tempo / Copyright
The title is written in a big font that is underlined and centered.
LIKE THIS
There are [a] and [A] buttons at the right side of the Title field. These change
the case of the title. ([A]= UPPER CASE, [a] = Lower Case).
If the title is long (or you're using big margins), then the font size will be
reduced, and the font won't be underlined for the title. Titles are limited to 60
characters.
The name of the Style that is saved with the song is automatically entered.
Click on the [T] button to insert the current Band-in-a-Box tempo, or type a
tempo into the Tempo field yourself.
The other fields are for Composer, Copyright information. You can get the ©
symbol by pressing the [©] button.
Left Margin / Right Margin. The left and right page margins are set in inches.
For example, you could set the margin to 1.25 inches.
Music Font Size
You can choose any size font you want for lead sheet printout. To change the
font size for printout, insert the font point size you would like in the “Music
Font Size” box. The larger the number, the bigger the font. The default is 24.
Setup
This launches the setup dialog box for your printer.
106
Chapter 7: Notation and Printing
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
Automatic Songs - “The Melodist”
Feel like composing a brand new song? With Band-in-a-Box you can
compose a new song in the style of your choice - complete with intro, chords,
melody, arrangement and improvisations, all created by the program! All you
have to do is pick from one of the “Melodists” and press OK - the program then
automatically generates the intro, chords, melody, and arrangement in the
chosen style. It even auto-generates a title for you, to complete your song! You
can go from nothing to a completed song in less than 1 second!
Once the song is generated, the chords and melody may be edited, modified,
printed, and saved as a MIDI file as with any other song. And you can autoregenerate any part of the song to modify the composition to your taste. The
Melodist will also generate a melody over an existing chord progression. A
Melodist “Jukebox” mode creates and performs new compositions in succession.
Aside from the compositional values of the Melodist, the features can be used as
a powerful practicing aid; improving sight reading by reading the melodies
generated in various keys using the Notation window, and ear training by
playing along with the chord progressions in the generated songs.
Launching the Melodist
To launch the Melodist, press the [Melodist] button on
the main screen, or use the Shift+F5 hot key.
Generate Chords and/or Melody Dialog
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
107
Once you launch the Melodist, you will see the Generate Chords and/or
Melody dialog. Let's explore the dialog screen.
The left of the screen has the list of the Melodists.
In the example above, the “Swing Tenor” is selected. This Melodist will
generate intro, chords, melody harmony, style, and solos using the group of
settings preset with this Melodist. For example, “Swing Tenor” uses “Jazz Easy
Style” (J~EASY.STY) and a Tenor Sax patch, and the Melody and Chord
settings in the Melody Maker.
Scroll down the list, and pick a Melodist that you'd like to use. Once you have
chosen a Melodist, examine the group of settings called “Chords and/or
Melody.”
108
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
This section determines what aspects of the song are going to be generated.
-
If you want to generate Chords, Melody, and an Intro, make sure that
these items are selected.
-
If you'd like a Pedal Bass figure during the intro and at the end of sections,
select the Insert Bass Pedals option.
-
Selecting Solo in Middle Ch. will generate an improvisation in the middle
choruses of the song.
-
If you'd like Band-in-a-Box to generate a title for your song select the AutoTitles option.
-
The Allow Style Changes checkbox, if set, allows a Melodist to load in the
style associated with it. If you don't want Melodists to change the current
style that you have loaded, then deselect this option.
-
The Auto-Titles option will generate a new title for the song.
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
109
-
The Form selection box allows you to choose between a song generated
with a specific form (AABA 32 bars) or no form. The AABA defaults to
32-bar form, which is the most popular song form.
Note: Melodists may alternatively be set to 64 bars (e.g. Melodist # 18 ColeP 64 bar form).
The song “form” refers to the pattern that the verse and chorus repeat. An “AABA 32” form
has 4 sections of 8 bars each - the “a” section is the verse and the “b” is the chorus (or
bridge) of the song. If you'd prefer for the song to have no form, you could set the song to
“no form” This wouldn't be a very musical setting, but might be useful for practicing or ear
training.
-
The # choruses setting determines how many choruses of the song form
(Melodies) are to be generated. For example, if set to 5, the Melodist will
generate 5 choruses, enough for an intro chorus, ending chorus, and 3
Middle Choruses. The # choruses setting defaults to the # choruses present
in the current song.
Preset Buttons
There are convenient buttons that will set these settings to popular presets. For
example, pressing the “Chords & Mel” button will set the checkboxes to
Generate Chords & Melody (but not Solos). The “All” button will generate
Chords, Melody and Solos. The Chords button sets the options to generate
Chords only (no Melody), and the Melody button will set the options to generate
only a Melody (no chords) over an existing chord progression.
The [Defaults] button sets the Melodist settings back to
Defaults.
The Tempo setting determines the Tempo of the song, and defaults to the current
tempo of the previous song. If “Auto-Tempo” is checked, the tempo will be set
by the tempo range stored with the Melodist. For example, if a Melodist is
called “Fast Waltz,” it would have a fast tempo range stored inside the Melodist
and the song would be generated at a fast tempo if the “auto-tempo” option is
set.
In songs with an AABA form, it is common for the second “a” section to be
transposed. For example, the first “a” section might be in the key of Eb, and the
110
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
second would be transposed up to the key of Gb. Melodists store these settings,
and some Melodists are set to transpose the A2 sections. If you don't want to
allow Melodists to transpose the form in this way, set the A2 transpose to none.
If set to “section plus” it will transpose the A2 section, and might transpose 2
bars early or 2 bars late. The song will only be transposed if the particular
Melodist is set to transpose the section.
The Song Key area determines the key
for the song. If set to Any Key, the
program will randomly pick a key for the
song, weighed more heavily toward the
popular keys like C and F.
The Minor Key % setting determines what % of songs would be generated in
minor keys (vs. major keys). If set to 20, then 20% of the songs would be
generated in minor keys. You can also set the Song Key Pop-up to a specific
key, or set it to use the current key of the previous song.
The next section of the Melodist Screen
allows you to select whether you want to
generate the “Whole Song” or just part of
the song. If you select part of the song, you
can specify which bar and chorus to start at,
and how many bars to generate. An easy
way to set the range of bars is to select the
bars by dragging the mouse over the chord
area prior to launching the Melodist dialog.
Then the “Generate” form will be
automatically set to “Part of Song” and the
range of bars will be set to the selected area.
If you were generating a song from scratch, you'd want to set “Generate Whole
Song.” After you listen to the song, you might want to improve on a certain
section of the song (say bars 5 and 6 of the first A section). To do this, from the
chordsheet window, select bars 5 and 6, and press the Melodist button again.
You'll notice that the “Generate Part of Song” radio button is set, with the range
set to bar 5 and 6. Pressing OK at this point will cause only bars 5 and 6 to be
regenerated, preserving the rest of the song. This allows you to repeatedly
generate/re-generate parts of the melody and/or chords until you get the
Melody/Chord progression that you're looking for!
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
111
If you have set the Melodist to “Generate
Part of Song” this would (in the example above) generate only bars 5 and 6 of
the song form (in the A section of an AABA form). If the form of the song were
AABA, you'd normally want the regenerated section to be repeated throughout
the form, in all of the “a” sections. The Replace Thru form will set the Melodist
to copy the generated bars 5 and 6 to the other “a” sections (bars 13, 14 and 29,
30).
If you'd like to remove the current Intro, Melody or Soloist Track, press the [Kill
Intro], [Kill Melody] or [Kill Soloist] button.
You can press the Search button and then type in part
of a Melodist name, memo, style name or other text
associated with a Melodist. This will then cause the
Melodist selection to change to the next item
containing the text. Similarly, you can type in a
number of a Melodist and press the [Go To #] button.
The Memo area displays a Memo for the current Melodist, as well as the name
of the database (e.g. MEL1.ST2) that the Melodist is based on.
Melodists can store patch and harmony settings, and these are displayed in the
patch area of the Melodist selection screen. You can also set the instrument to
change each chorus (for example from vibes to guitar to piano). You can override the settings of the current Melodist and choose your own patch, harmony
and change instrument settings in these controls.
112
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
The Melodist Jukebox will continuously
generate new songs, and play them in
jukebox fashion. You can set the range
of Melodists to include in the jukebox
(using the From…To settings) or keep
the Jukebox on the same Melodist by deselecting “Change Melodists.” To
Launch the Melodist Jukebox, press
[Juke Songs Now] (option+j).
Normally you'd want the Melodist to be written to the Melody track. If you'd
prefer the Melody to be written to the Soloist track (e.g. for a counter melody)
then set the ‘Write to Track” setting to Soloist.
The favorites button allows you to pick a Melodist that
you've used recently.
Editing Melodists
If you'd like to create your own Melodists, or
permanently change the settings of existing
Melodists, press the[Edit…] button to launch the
Melodist Maker, which is described elsewhere in
detail.
Using the Melodist
Generating Complete Songs
Here are some ways that you can use the Melodist by generating complete
songs.
-
The most obvious use of the Melodist is that you can generate an entire
song – complete with intro, chords, melodies, full 5 part instrument
arrangement, pedal bass figures, solo improvisations and even an automatic
title. You can customize the song to your liking, regenerate any of the
elements (chords, melody etc.), or any part of the song until you “get it
right.” Either way, the end product is a complete song. What a great
compositional and educational tool!
-
Sight Reading: You can put the Band-in-a-Box Melodist in Jukebox
mode, so that it is continually generating and playing new songs in
succession. By displaying the Melody track in Notation, you can then
sight-read along with the Melody. Since the melodies are unique, this is the
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
113
ideal type of sight-reading practice; playing along to music that you haven't
heard before.
-
Ear Training: Play along with the Melodies and chords that the program is
generating, without looking at the music. Since Band-in-a-Box is always
using intelligent chord progressions and melody phrasing that a professional
would actually use, you are learning to recognize chord progressions and
melody phrases that you will encounter in real playing situations.
-
Guitarists can extend the 'Sight Reading' concept by just watching the
on-screen guitar fretboard play the melody notes. If a student were
watching his teacher reading music, he would watch the guitar not the sheet
music. This is because guitar is a very visual instrument. Similarly, you
may prefer to watch the on-screen guitar instead of the notation.
Generate Less than a Complete Song
Here are ways that you can use the Melodist short of generating a full song:
-
Auto-generate / regenerate / remove an intro for an existing song. You
can learn from the intelligent chord progressions that are generated to lead
in to the first chord of the song.
-
Auto generate pedal bass patterns over existing songs, to add
tension/release effect to your Band-in-a-Box arrangements.
-
Generate chords only, and then compose your own melody by playing or
singing along with the chord progression. This can help composers to write
new songs by starting them off with a chord progression that they might not
ordinarily use. And if you're stuck at a certain bar, see what BB will
generate/regenerate as a melody for that section.
-
Generate chords only, and practice playing your musical instrument
along with the chord progressions. Print out the generated lead sheet of
chords so that you can see the chords easily on the music stand. Working
with new chord progressions is useful to “get-out-of-a-rut” in your
practicing by playing new chord progressions. You can also improve your
harmony ear training, by figuring out the chords as they are being played,
without looking at the chord symbol display.
-
Generate Melodies only, over existing chord progressions.
Using Melodist Jukebox
Use the versatile Melodist Jukebox feature to:
-
Generate Songs (Chords & Melodies) in succession
-
Generate Solos only over generated chord progressions
-
Generate Solos over the same chord progression (to practice blues soloing
for example).
114
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
Automatic Intros
The Melodist will automatically generate an introduction for the songs it creates.
It is also possible to generate an introduction for any song from the Edit | Intro
Bars Auto-Generate menu option (Ctrl+Shift+B).
This will create a chord progression that gets inserted as an intro to the song,
based on the optional settings you choose.
Chord Types can be Jazz or Pop.
Intro Length can be 2, 4 or 8 bars to suit the tempo of the song.
Starting Chord (after intro) is lets the intro lead in to the song correctly.
Pedal Bass has a list of pedal bass options, based in the key entered in the box.
Press the [(Re)-Generate Intro Chords] button to auto-generate chords for an
intro.
Press the [Remove Intro] button to remove the intro from the song.
Automatic Song Title Generation
The Melodist will optionally give a title to the songs it writes. Song titles can
also be generated on demand with the User | Auto-Generate Song Title menu
command (Ctrl+Shift+S). The song title will appear in the Title window.
Repeat the Auto-Generate Song Title command until the program comes up with
a suitable title for your song. Band-in-a-Box will keep generating new titles for
as long as it takes to get the right one.
Automatic Solo Generation – “The Soloist”
Pick any song or chords in any style, and choose a “Soloist.” Band-in-a-Box
then creates and plays a professional quality solo in the style of your choice. In
addition to great Band-in-a-Box accompaniment, you can hear sensational solos
as well - showing you exactly what notes are played. Choose from “soloists” in
a style similar to great Jazz musicians such as Django Reinhardt, John Coltrane,
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
115
Country/Pop soloists and others, or create your own soloists using the “Soloist
Maker.”
Select a Soloist
To select a pre-made Soloist, click on the [Solo] button on the toolbar, press
Shift+F4, or choose SOL | Generate and Play a Solo. This will launch the
Select Soloist dialog.
Now, select the type of Soloist (“Soloist type” list box) and choose the
appropriate style. This will bring up a list of Soloists in that style. Then, simply
choose which one you would like to hear and what instrument you would like
the Soloist to play.
There are additional settings in the Select Soloist window to have the Soloist
play a “Harmonized” solo, just like the Melody Harmony feature, in the style of
your choice.
Solo Wizard
Additionally, you will find another great feature in the Solo mode list, the “Solo
Wizard.” With this mode selected, the program will play correct notes in the
style of the current Soloist as you play notes on the MIDI or QWERTY
keyboard,
Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess,
this feature has practical implications as well. For example, you can concentrate
116
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
on practicing your solo phrasing and playing in time without concerning
yourself with which notes to play (Band-in-a-Box will supply the correct notes.)
Tip: The Soloist will use the velocities you play or pick its own, depending on the setting in
the Edit | Preferences (2) | Soloist Prefs... “Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard” checkbox.
Editing Soloists
If you'd like to create your own Soloists,
or permanently change the settings of
existing Soloists, you can press the [Edit]
button to launch the Soloist Maker, which
is described elsewhere in detail.
Using the Soloist Feature
-
Generate a Soloist and practice the solo by looping it, slowing it down, or
printing it out, until you can perform a great solo on any chord changes!
-
Generate a Soloist and attach a Harmony such as “Big Band Brass” to
create phenomenally quick and interesting Big Band Arrangements
automatically. Generate a standard MIDI file or print them out for you and
your friends.
-
Have the Soloist play a solo according to your accompaniment and
arrangement.
-
Trade 4's with the Soloist (you solo for 4 bars, BB solos for 4 bars, etc.)
-
Concentrate separately on different aspects of your playing with assistance
from the “Wizard.” From soloing with proper phrasing and “feel” (and the
best notes) to accompanying a soloist with confidence and authority.
-
Use the Soloist track to record another part in addition to the Melody and
other parts provided by Band-in-a-Box.
-
Generate a Soloist on chords/keys that you would like to practice. For
example, if you want to work on your II-V7-I progressions, you can just
type the chords you want, and generate a solo to play over those changes.
As the solo plays, you see the notation, you can sight read along. Pressing
the “Loop Screen” checkbox on the notation will loop the notation the
screen so you can master each 4 bar phrase (II-V-I) and then move ahead to
the next one!
A Few Technical Notes on the Soloist.
1) The Soloist has its own separate channel and settings. But when the
Soloist uses a Harmony, it becomes linked to the Thru Harmony
channels and settings. Since we are already using 12 of the available
16 MIDI channels in Band-in-a-Box, we didn't want to use up another 2
channels on dedicated Soloist Harmony channels. So if you want to
hear a Soloist with harmony, use the THRU Harmony settings. In other
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
117
words, wherever a THRU harmony is selected, the Soloist part will use
the THRU Harmony settings.
2) We have designed the Soloist not to repeat any solo ideas so that the
solos are always fresh, with new ideas forming and playing all the time.
As a result, we have included a Refresh Soloist menu item under the
SOL menu that, when selected, will allow the Soloist to “think about”
all of its musical notions again. Choosing the “Refresh Soloist” option
(Shift+F7) is like telling the soloist “It's OK, you can play whatever
you like, even if it's something that you played 5 minutes ago.”
3) The Soloist menu contains many options. It has all of the same editing
options found in the Melody menu, so you can treat the Soloist track as
a 2nd melody track. Even if you don't plan to use the Automatic
Soloist feature, you can just use the Soloist track as a 2nd track for
counter melodies, overdubs etc. The result; two melody tracks, two
solo tracks, or one melody and one solo track all at your disposal for
any song, without having to resort to an outboard sequencer.
Solo Modes
As well as the normal mode of soloing for a
number of choruses while the melody is
silent, the Soloist has several other modes.
For example, Fills will “noodle” over the
changes for a percentage of time. Other
modes are Solo Around Melody, Trade 4s,
Solo Wizard, and Custom Solo for a Specific
Range of Bars.
Around Melody option.
This option for the Soloist part creates a solo around the melody, that is, at times
when the melody is silent. To solo around the melody, do the following:
1.
Open up a song that has a melody, preferably a sparse melody with some
space in it that a Soloist might be able to “jump in.”
2.
Press the Soloist button. Select the Solo Mode “Around Melody.”
3.
Set the Soloist to play in All Choruses, and uncheck the “Mute Melody in
Middle” option.
4.
Press [OK] and the solo will be generated, playing riffs at times when the
melody isn't playing.
118
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
Tip: For added effect, add a guitar chord solo to the Soloist part using the Chord
Solo button on the Guitar and choosing Solo as the destination. Or simply choose a
Guitar Harmony like 32 J Pass.
Custom Solo Generation
You can redo any part of the solo that you don't like with the ability to generate
and regenerate parts of the solo. There is a [Custom…] button on the Select
Soloist dialog. This launches a custom solo dialog to allow you to set the range
that you'd like for the solo:
Tip: You can have these values preset to the values you'd like by first selecting the range
of bars that you'd like from the Chordsheet screen, and then clicking on the Soloist button.
Usually soloists end a little after a bar end –i.e. they play a couple of extra notes.
Setting the “OK to solo for an extra beat” will allow this.
If you want to overdub a solo and have multiple solo tracks going at once, deselect “Overwrite existing solo in range.”
Once you press the [Generate Solo Now] button, the portion of the solo that
you have selected will be generated. The song will then start playing two bars
before the new part, so you can quickly hear the new solo.
Remember that the custom solo generation can be used with different soloists,
so you can use a “Tenor Sax Jazz” soloist for a few bars, and then insert a
custom “Bluegrass Banjo” soloist for four bars and so on.
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
119
Soloing over Slash Chords
The Soloist analyzes slash chords (like C/Bb) to determine the best scale type to
use (e.g. Bb Lydian). There's nothing you need to do, this function happens
automatically behind the scenes.
Fours Soloing
Band-in-a-Box can generate the first four or the second four bars. “Trading
fours” refers to a solo lasting four bars, usually followed by a different melodic
solo (or drum solo) for the next four bars. It’s fun to solo along with Band-in-aBox in 4's mode, letting the computer solo for four bars, followed by your solo.
In the Select Soloist dialog,
you can click on the button beside the “Trade 4's” radio control to select whether
you want the first four bars or the second four bars. If set to 1st, the soloist will
take bars 1-4, 9-12, etc. And if set to 2nd, it will solo on bars 5-8, 13-16, etc.
The fours are based on the beginning of the chorus, not the first bar of the song.
You can generate four bars trading off with each other in two ways. The easiest
way is to choose the Normal Solo mode, and select the “Change Instrument
Every 4 bars” option. This results in different instruments taking four bar solos.
Another method is to choose the trade 4's option, generate 4's using the first
setting, and then choose SOL | Edit Soloist Track | Swap Melody and Soloist
Track, and then generate a solo again, using the second set of four bars. This
will result in 4's with one track on Melody and the other on the Soloist track.
Automatic Guitar Chord Solos – “The Guitarist”
With Band-in-a-Box, you can generate a guitar chord solo for any melody.
Band-in-a-Box will intelligently arrange the melody into a guitar chord solo by
inserting real guitar voicings throughout the piece. You can select from among
many Guitarists to create your arrangement. And you can define your own
Guitarists, choosing parameters such as strum speed, types of voicings
(Pop/Jazz), embellishments, and many more. You can easily make and learn a
professional quality guitar chord solo to your favorite song!
Generate a Guitar Chord Solo
Load in a song with a melody in it. We suggest the song GIT_TEST that should
be in your Songs folder. If it isn't there, choose the song “Old Folks at Home”
or any other song with a melody.
Open the Guitar window (Ctrl+Shift+G).
120
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
Launch the Chord Solo function with the [Ch. Solo] button,
or select MEL | Generate Chord Solo.
Select Guitarist Window.
Once you press the Chord Solo button, you'll see the Select Guitarist window.
Here are the steps needed to generate your Chord Solo:
1.
Select the Guitarist to Use. In the main list at the left of the Window, you
see the list of Guitarists that is already defined. For example, you can see
that Guitarist #2 is called “Jazz Guitar, single position.” That will create
chord solos that stick to a single position on the guitar neck whenever
possible.
2.
Select Melody or Soloist track. You'd normally want the Guitar Chord
solo to be written to the Melody track, but you can also select the Soloist
track as the destination.
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
121
3.
Confirm the Guitar Patch Selection. The Guitarist that you pick (see
item #1) will already have chosen the guitar patch to use, but you can
override it with this setting.
4.
Select the Range of the song to use. You can either generate a chord solo
for the whole song, or just a region of the song. In either case, remember
that you need to have an existing melody to work with. You can use the
Melodist to generate a melody if you don't have one.
5.
Select the Main Guitar Position to use. Band-in-a-Box has a setting
called “Auto Set” that will set the main guitar position for the solo for you,
based on the key signature. For example, in the key of C, Band-in-a-Box
will choose the 5th position as the best position for the chord solo to be
played. You can override this. For example, if you wanted the solo to be in
the 12th position you could de-select the “Auto-Set” and then set the guitar
position to 12th position.
6.
Change Guitar channel. In case you already have a guitar track that has
guitar channels (for example if it was already played on a guitar controller
as a single string guitar part), then you might want to tell Band-in-a-Box not
to change the guitar positions of the notes that it finds. Normally you'd
want to set “OK to change existing guitar channels” to true.
7.
Press [OK] to generate the Guitar Chord Solo.
122
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
You'll now see a message box confirming that a chord solo has been added.
Playing the Guitar Chord Solo
The playback will begin automatically, and you'll see the guitar voicings on the
guitar neck. For example, at Bar 8, the chord is a C#dim and Band-in-a-Box has
voiced a Bb melody note with a 4-note guitar voicing of Bb, E, C#, and G.
This particular solo will be played in a single position, because those are the
parameters of this particular guitarist. Other Guitarists will play in a range of
positions (e.g. Guitarist #1), or in open position (e.g. Guitarist # 8).
As you listen to the solo, you'll notice the following:
1.
Some of the notes are left as melody, and some are assigned to chords.
2.
Wide varieties of guitar chords are used, including some advanced chords.
All of them are popular chords played by real guitarists – there are no
theoretical chords.
Chapter 8: Automatic Music Features
123
3.
The chords are strummed, to simulate a real guitar player.
4.
The Track Type for the Melody has been set to Guitar, and the MIDI file
will be saved with the Guitar Channels (11-16) preserved which preserves
the fret positions.
Note: All of these items can be customized in the Guitarist Maker, which is launched
by the [Edit...] button in the Select Guitarist dialog.
Redo Part of the Solo
Let's redo part of the solo at a higher fret position. This particular song
GIT_TEST.MGU has 6 choruses, and the last 3 choruses have a much higher
range of soloing. Let's redo that part of the solo, using a higher fret position.
We'll press the [Ch. Solo] button again, de-select the auto-set position button,
and choose the 12 position. Since we only want to regenerate this for the
choruses 4 to 6, we set the range to “Part of Song” and the range to start at
chorus 4, bar 1, and range of 96 bars. This will rewrite the solo, by first
removing the existing guitar chord solo (if any) and then generating a new one.
Technical Note: Since some of the guitarists can be assigned to strum the chords in
a delayed fashion, if you repeatedly re-generate the solo, the melody will become
more and more delayed. The solution(s) would be to choose Edit | Undo Solo prior to
re-generating the solo, or picking a Guitarist that doesn't delay the strum. The Strum
delay status is indicated on the “Info” panel of the Select Guitarist screen.
Saving the Guitar Chord Solo
Once you have generated a Guitar chord solo it becomes part of the notation
track. You can edit it like any other part by deleting/inserting notes, etc.
The solo will be saved with the song (MGU) and exported to a MIDI file, with
the string positions intact (because we use channels 11 to 16 for the Guitar part).
You can remove the solo at any time, even after the solo has been
saved/reloaded, by choosing MEL | Remove Harmony (or guitar solo) from
Melody Track.
Editing Guitarists
Guitarists can be customized using
the Guitarist Maker, which is
described elsewhere in detail and is
launched by the [Edit...] button in
the Select Guitarist dialog.
124
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
Overview
Band-in-a-Box has a built-in sequencer allowing you to record and edit up to
two MIDI tracks. One track is the Melody track, the other is the Soloist track,
and they are identical in function. Most often melodies are recorded, but the two
sequencer tracks can be used for any type of MIDI recording – overdubs, extra
parts, or 2-part melodies. MIDI can be recorded into Band-in-a-Box in a
number of ways:
-
From a MIDI keyboard or MIDI controller connected to your computer.
-
In the Notation window using your mouse.
-
With the Wizard feature using your QWERTY keyboard.
Real Time Recording
If you want to record using your MIDI controller (keyboard, guitar, wind),
-
click on the [Rec] button, or
-
type the letter “r,” or
-
choose Record Melody from the MEL menu, or
-
go to Edit Soloist Track | Record Soloist in the SOL menu.
The Record Track dialog box will appear:
Choose where you want to start recording your track:
-
from the start of the song,
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
125
-
at a specified bar,
-
at the tag,
-
from the end of the track.
If you select “Overdub Underlying Notes,” you will hear the melody that you're
overdubbing.
Click on the [Filter] button to open the Record Filter dialog. This lets you
choose which MIDI information you want to record and which you want to
leave out. This lets you eliminate unnecessary MIDI information.
Click OK to return to the Record Track dialog, and press the [Record] button or
the letter “r” again to begin recording.
Tip: If you're sure that the settings are correct, just press r twice, and you won't have to
see the Record Track dialog.
When the recording is finished, you have several options.
126
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
[OK - Keep Take] will save the take that was just recorded.
Copy 1st Chorus to Whole Song
If you have recorded one chorus of the song, checking this at the end of the
recording will copy the same recording to all of the choruses.
Overdub Underlying Notes
You have the option to merge the recording with existing melody. If there is no
underlying melody - this option will be grayed out.
Retain Past Last Recorded
You have the option to keep or erase any melody after the last recorded note.
Step Edit Notes
You can step edit a recorded track, or create a new track in the Edit Note/Time
Etc., dialog. Select Step edit Notes… from the MEL menu.
This feature is very useful if you have recorded a good take with just a minor
glitch. Rather than lose the whole take, you can use the step edit feature to fix
the track and save the take.
Note Number
The note is played out through the MIDI driver so you can hear it. The note is
also drawn on the Keyboard at the top of the screen so you can see it.
Input the MIDI Note Number. There are 128 MIDI notes. Every C note is a
multiple of 12, which makes middle C (called C5 for the 5th octave) note number
60. For example, C5 = 60, C#5 = 61, D5 = 62 etc.). In the example above
therefore the note = 64 would be 4 semitones above middle C, an E.
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
127
Velocity
Type in a velocity to control the volume that the note is played at. Change the
velocity to zero to stop a note from being played. Note that you can globally
change the volume of a melody track, from the melody pull down menu
Time
Represents the total time in ticks for the current event from the beginning of the
song. At 120 ppq resolution, a quarter note equals 120 ticks and a bar of 4/4
time is 480 ticks. This number includes the lead-in bar of 480 ticks.
Bar #, Beat Number, Tick
The Bar, Beat, and Tick show the time that the note is played. Ticks are the
smallest unit, equal to 1/120th of a quarter note.
Duration
This is the length of time that the note is played. 120 ticks of duration = 1 beat
(quarter note).
Previous/Next Event
Use these arrow controls to move through the MIDI track one note at a time.
Insert Before/After
This allows you to insert an event before or after the currently displayed event.
Note: You can get better results by using the Notation window to edit notes instead of this
window. To do this, you open the Notation window and mouse click on a note while holding
down the option key in Staff Roll or Editable notation mode.
Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window
You can enter melody notes directly to the track in the Notation window in
either the Editable Notation Mode or the Staff Roll Mode.
Enter the Editable Notation mode from the Standard Notation screen
with a single mouse click on the [N] button.
In the Editable Notation mode you can enter, move, and edit notes and rests
using standard mouse techniques – point and click, drag and drop, and
Option+Click to open the Note Edit dialog box.
Recording with the Wizard Feature
This is a very helpful feature if you don’t have a MIDI keyboard but you want to
record with a “live” feel. Use the Wizard to record notes from the computer’s
QWERTY keyboard for a track that’s more natural than step time.
Here’s how it works:
1.
2.
128
Enable the Wizard checkbox.
Press [r] key to record.
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
3.
As the song plays, play the melody on any keys on the bottom two rows of
the QWERTY keyboard, in the rhythm of the melody. The “wizard” notes
won't be the correct melody of course, but don't worry about that as you
record. When you're finished, look in the Notation window. You’ll see
notes in the right places and with the correct durations, but with the wrong
pitches.
4.
Drag the notes with the mouse and drop them on the correct place on the
staff. You’ll hear the notes play as you drop them, and the names will show
in the note name box. For sharps, flats, and naturals, hold down the shift
key, control key, or key respectively. You'll end up with a melody that
sounds like it was recorded live, without the rigid feel of tracks entered in
step time.
Tip: If you have the wizard “On,” the spacebar won’t stop playback. You need to press
[Esc] key to stop playback when the Wizard is on. This is to prevent stopping the song
inadvertently if you mistakenly hit the spacebar while playing the wizard.
Importing Pre-Recorded MIDI Data
Standard MIDI files can be read in to the Melody or Soloist tracks from MIDI
files or from the clipboard. You can read in all of a MIDI file, or selected
channels and a specific range of bars. Use one of the following two commands:
1.
MEL | Import Melody from MIDI File… to select a MIDI file from disk
using the file dialog.
2.
MEL | Import Melody from Clipboard - when the MIDI data is already
copied from another program to the clipboard.
Once chosen, the Import MIDI File dialog box opens.
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
129
Import Which Channel(s)?
You'll need to know which channel(s) of your MIDI file the melody is on. You
then select these channels for Band-in-a-Box to read in. If you select all of the
channels, Band-in-a-Box will read all of the channels and merge them to the
Melody track. You can import and play the complete file on the Melody track if
the Track Type is set to “Multi (16) Channel” in the MEL menu.
If you have such a MIDI guitar part that was recorded with separate pitch bend
information on 6 channels, you can import the 6 channels into Band-in-a-Box
Set the Melody track to be a guitar track (MEL | Track Type), and then use the
Guitar Settings dialog (in the Guitar window) to set the “Output guitar tracks on
6 channels for this song” to be true. This has been done for the “Nashville
Solos” files like NG001.MGU (available as an add-on to Band-in-a-Box).
When this option is set, the patch changes, panning and so on will be sent on all
6 MIDI channels.
# bars to offset from start
If you want to start reading from the beginning of the MIDI file, select 0 as the
offset. If you want to be read starting at bar 32, for example, select an offset of
32 (bars).
How many bars to import
Leave this setting at the default of 1000 to read-in the entire file (unless it’s
longer than 1000 bars!), or set it to the number of bars that you are interested in
if you don't want the whole file.
# blank b. to insert at beginning
This will insert blank bars into the Melody track. Remember that Band-in-aBox normally has a 2 bar lead-in count. If your MIDI file has no lead-in, then
you'll need to set this to = 2 to compensate for the 2 bars of lead-in.
Include notes early by (120 ppq)
If you’re reading in a MIDI file starting at bar 5, it would be annoying to have a
note that was played 1 tick earlier than bar 5 left out of the MIDI file that is read
in. To include it, you can set this, and the note will be read in.
Include continuous controllers and pitch bend /Patch changes
Select the items you want to include when the track is imported.
Merge with existing data on Track
You can choose to merge the imported data with your existing Melody track.
Record using The Melodist
There’s always the option to let Band-in-a-Box do it all by writing an original
melody with its Melodist feature. It will do this over the chord changes you
enter in the chordsheet, or it will generate its own changes for whatever style
you select from the Melodist dialog.
130
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
This feature is useful for stimulating ideas, for creating instant songs for sight
reading exercises, to demonstrate different musical styles, or for background
music.
Additional Options for Melody/Soloist Track
Manipulation of melodies is done with functions like insert/delete beats, time
shift track, copy melody from bar... to bar..., etc. Press Option+C to Copy
Chords and /or Melody over a range of bars.
Time Shift Melody.
This will move (slide) the melody a certain number of ticks. There are 120 ticks
per quarter note. For example, to give the song a more laid-back feel, time shift
it about 10 ticks ahead.
Intelligent Humanize of Melody and Soloist track.
Most quantize routines can leave the music sounding stiff and unmusical. Some
attempt to “humanize” a part by adding “randomization,” which rarely has the
desired effect since humans don't randomly change timing or volume. Band-ina-Box uses intelligent humanization routines that can humanize a melody from
one feel to another, from one tempo to another, and vary the amount of swing to
8th notes. The results are very musical, with natural sounding melodies.
Let's look at some of the parameters found under the Humanize menu items.
In this example, MEL | Humanize Melody was selected. This opens the
Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog box.
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
131
We have broken down the Humanize effect into 5 main categories:
1.
Tempo
2.
Lateness
3.
8th note spacing
4.
Legato
5.
Feel
The best way to learn how these parameters combine is to try them. You can
always press [Undo] button if you don't like the results. For example, try
changing the tempo of a song to see the changes that this will make to the 8th
note spacing and lateness.
Tip: Usually, when a musician plays at faster tempos, he/she plays the swing 8th notes
closer together, and a little later.
These categories are very straightforward and you should have no trouble
achieving the desired results. Remember to apply such parameters as Legato
and Lateness sparingly.
Insert Beats/Delete Beats in Melody.
For example, to insert 2 bars in the melody at bar 5, Choose MEL | Insert Beats
In Melody, and select bar 5, and select 8 beats (2 bars) to insert.
Additional Copy function for Chords/Melody
This allows you to Copy Chords and/or Melody for a range of bars.
Press the [Copy] button to launch the dialog box or select
the Copy From.. To option from the Edit menu or press
option+c.
Melody Embellisher
When musicians see a lead sheet that has a melody written out, they would
almost never play it exactly as written. They would change the timing to add
132
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
syncopation, change durations to achieve staccato or legato playing, add grace
notes, slurs, extra notes, vibrato, and other effects. Now you can have Band-ina-Box do these automatically using the Melody Embellisher. If you enable the
Embellisher, any melody will be embellished as it is played, so that you hear a
livelier and more realistic melody - and it's different every time.
The Melody Embellisher feature is turned on and off by the
Embellisher checkbox on the main screen.
The Melody Embellisher settings are accessed during playback with
the embellisher (grace note) button on the main screen, or from the
MEL | Embellish Melody during playback menu item.
The Melody Embellisher only functions during playback. If enabled, the
melody that plays will be embellished. You’ll see the embellished melody on
the notation as the melody plays, so you can see the embellished notes. When
[Stop] is pressed, the notation reverts to the original unembellished melody.
The embellishment changes timing of notes, durations, velocities, legato, as well
as adding grace notes, additional notes, and turns. Here is a before-and-after
example that shows a typical embellishment of a melody.
Original (unembellished) Melody…
Embellished Melody…
As you can see in the notation examples, the embellished melody adds
anticipation in bar 9, and in bar 10 adds extra notes and timing changes to spice
up the melody.
Using the Embellisher
If you disable the Embellisher, by de-selecting the Embellisher
checkbox, the melody (or solo) will play as normal with no
changes.
There is a Melody Embellisher dialog. This allows you to,
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
133
-
Customize the settings of the Embellisher.
-
Choose Embellisher type from presets.
-
Make a particular embellishment permanent.
The Melody Embellisher dialog is launched from the MEL | Embellish
Melody Dialog menu item (control+option+l) or the Embellisher (grace
note) button on the main screen.
“Live Auto-embellish
during every playback” is the same setting that is on the main page checkbox. If
enabled, embellishment will occur during every playback. If disabled,
embellishment will not occur unless you choose the [(Re-) Embellish NOW Permanent] button in the dialog.
Embellisher Presets
The presets allow you to choose a combination of common settings for the
Embellisher quickly.
The Embellisher Memo describes the current embellishment, with statistics
counting the number of embellished notes.
134
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
If the song is playing and the Embellisher is enabled, you can update the
embellishment by pressing this button. This is useful if you've changed settings,
and want to hear what the new embellishment sounds like.
Normally the embellishment occurs live when the song is playing, and doesn't
affect the Melody track permanently. But if you like the embellishment, and
want to apply it permanently to the melody, you can choose the [Make Current
Embellishment Permanent] option.
If the song is not currently playing, you can still create an embellishment and
have it apply permanently by pressing the [(Re-) Embellish NOW – Permanent]
button.
The original Melody track is not permanently affected unless you have press the
[(Re-) Embellish NOW – Permanent] button. If you have done this, and want to
restore the original melody, you can press the [Restore Original Melody] button.
The Embellisher is usually referred to as the Melody Embellisher, because you'll
usually want to have it affecting the Melody track. But if you'd prefer it to
affect the Soloist track, you can choose the Soloist track as the Embellisher
track.
Embellisher Settings
The settings contain a number of parameters that affect the embellishment.
They can be turned on and off, and can be set with certain percentage strength.
The settings are:
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
135
Humanize: The velocities, durations (legato), and timing of the notes are
humanized. The original velocities etc. of the notes are ignored. This is useful
when the melody has been entered in a stiff manner.
Octave: The octave of the Melody is changed to the best octave for the current
Melody instrument. For example, if the instrument were a Piccolo the octave
would be raised to the best range for a piccolo. There is an additional setting for
the octave in the “More” settings dialog.
Anticipation: An anticipated note is played early, or “ahead of the beat,” as in
this example.
Unembellished notes
Embellishment with anticipations on beat 1 and 3
Less Anticipation: This is the opposite of anticipation. This finds notes that
are anticipated, and “embellishes” them by playing them later (on the beat).
Grace Notes: The grace notes are brief notes played just before, and a semi-tone
below the original note. The grace notes intentionally don't show on the
notation, so that it will remain easily readable. They can be heard.
Doubled Notes: Melody notes are doubled with the same pitch.
Unembellished …
136
“C” quarter note is
doubled to 2 eighth
notes.
Embellished …
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
Extra Notes: Extra notes are added between melody notes.
Unembellished …
In this before-andafter example, an Eb
and E note are added
between the D and F.
With Extra Notes added …
Note “Turns”: With a note turn, a single note is replaced by a group of notes
that includes the original note and the semitone or scale tones above and below.
Unembellished …
In this before-andafter example, the C
note is replaced by a
“turn” of 3 notes
with a note a scale
tone above the C.
Embellished with turn …
Vibrato: Vibrato can be added according to the additional vibrato settings
available in the “More” dialog. The vibrato can't be seen on the notation
window, but you can examine the events in the Event List.
If set, the Melody will be delayed a
little, providing a “laid-back” feeling.
There are additional settings in the Embellisher Additional
Settings dialog box.
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
137
This allows you to set advanced settings for the Embellisher. These include,
-
Vibrato Depth: This is the amplitude of the vibrato, ranging from 0 - 127.
-
Vibrato Speed: This is the speed of the vibrato (slow-fast) range 0 - 127.
-
Only use Vibrato if Note is this many ticks: e.g., If set to 120 ticks (one
quarter note), then only notes of at least that duration will get vibrato.
-
Start the Vibrato after this many ticks: For notes that will get vibrato, the
vibrato will start after this many ticks.
-
Adjust Octave Method: If the octave is to be adjusted, it will either only
adjust it if the notes are outside the playable range, or always adjust it to the
best octave, according to the setting you make here.
-
Dynamic Range: Refers to the range of velocities used for the
humanization. Useful range 30 to 50.
-
Legato Settings: Refers to the amount of legato for the notes. Useful
range 55 to 75.
138
Chapter 9: Recording Tracks
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
Animated Drum Kit
This sizable window is a cool animated 3D display of a complete drum kit, with
all 61 Drum sounds displayed on their instruments. Watch the various drum
instruments being played, or play-along/record on any of the drum instruments
by using QWERTY keys or a mouse. Very educational and lots of fun!
To launch the Drum Kit window, click the Drums button, or choose the
Windows | Drum Window option. Then the Drums Kit window will
display an animated display of a complete GM drum kit.
You can do several things with the Drums Window:
-
Watch the Drum part being played on the Drums Window in real time.
-
Play along with the drums in real time by mouse clicking on the Drum
Instrument, or using QWERTY keys (the key names to use are listed on the
Drums Window).
-
Record a drum part into Band-in-a-Box. To do this, simply press RECORD
in Band-in-a-Box and play along.
Note: If you want to record a drum part to the Melody track, you'll have to set the Melody
channel to 10 using the M | MIDI Settings… menu item.
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
139
Drum Display
All the General MIDI percussion instruments are shown.
Acoustic Bass Drum
Bass Drum 1
Side Stick
Acoustic Snare
Hand Clap
Electric Snare
Low Floor Tom
Closed Hi-Hat
High Floor Tom
Pedal Hi-Hat
Low Tom
Open Hi-Hat
Low-Mid Tom
Hi Mid Tom
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Hi Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute Hi Conga
Open Hi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Whistle
Long Whistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Hi Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Some percussion instruments are triggered by multiple MIDI notes. When
controlled by more than one MIDI note, a percussion instrument will show
different behavior in response to the different notes. For instance, the Hi-Hat
responds differently to Close Hat, Pedal Hat, and Open Hat MIDI notes.
The on-screen instruments may be played by mouse-click or computer keys.
When playing by mouse-click or computer keys, the shift key adjusts velocity
between two user-specified levels.
Drums that you play show up in blue (the computer played drums are red).
There is an option to display all the QWERTY names on the drums at the same
time, so that you can see what keys to hit without having to mouse over the
instrument. The drums can be moved off-screen without snapping back to the
middle.
To display the QWERTY keys on the notes, select the option in the Drums
Window Settings dialog to “Display QWERTY Chars on Drums.”
Multi-note instruments send different notes depending on where you click on the
instrument. For instance, the Kick Drum can send three different notes, Ac.
Bass Drum (MIDI note 35), Bass Drum 1 (MIDI note 36), and Square Kick
(MIDI Note 32).
140
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
The hint line at the top of the window describes the current control under the
mouse cursor. Use the hint line to learn the mouse-responsive areas of each
drum instrument.
Multi-Note Drums Instruments
Kick Drum - Ac. Bass Drum, Bass Drum 1, Square Kick
Snare - Acoustic Snare, Side Stick
HiHat - Closed, Pedal, Open
Floor Tom - Low, High
Electronic Pad - Multi-zoned for Hi-Q, Slap, Electric Snare
High Conga - Mute, Open
Surdo - Mute, Open
Cuica - Mute, Open
Metronome - Bell, Click
Whistle - Long, Short
Triangle - Mute, Open
Guiro - Long, Short
Scratch - Push, Pull
Computer “QWERTY” Drum Keys
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
141
Numeric Keypad Drum Keys
Strike computer keys to play drums.
Drums are grouped on the computer keyboard by category. The kick, snare, and
hi-hat sounds are on the lowest keyboard row. The lower-middle row contains
toms and cymbals. The upper-middle row contains Latin drums, and the top
row contains Latin hand percussion.
The numeric keypad keys contain the remainder of the Latin hand percussion
plus the electronic tones.
Drum Kit Main Window
The Drums main window can be resized to tile with other Macintosh of interest.
On 256 color displays, the image does not look its best. The window looks its
best if the computer is in Thousands-of-colors (16 bit) or Millions-of-Colors (24
bit) video mode.
Drum Transport Controls
Place the mouse cursor on each control to see its function.
-
Record: Place Band-in-a-Box in Record mode so drum instruments can be
recorded.
-
Play: Start Band-in-a-Box song playback.
-
Rewind: Stop and return to song start.
-
Stop: Stop Band-in-a-Box playback.
-
Size Buttons 1/1, 1/2, 1/4: Preset the window to full size, half size, or
quarter-size. If the window has been changed to a size different from these,
by dragging a window border, none of the size buttons will be down.
Settings Dialog: Adjust program behavior.
142
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
Drum Window Settings
Press the Settings button (to the left of Rewind button), to adjust Drum
Window Settings.
Note: If your computer video is in 256-color mode, the colors in the Drums window may
sometimes appear strange. To display the drum window at its best, use Thousands-ofcolors (16 bit) or millions-of-colors (24 bit) video modes.
Velocity: When playing drums with a mouse or computer keys, the shift key
toggles between two levels of note velocity. The default velocity is 90, with a
default shift key velocity of 127.
The two velocity levels can be set any way desired. For instance, if you want
the shift key to send quiet notes, program the shift velocity lower than the nonshift velocity.
Randomize: Enables the Randomize checkbox to send random velocity levels
when playing by mouse or computer keyboard.
Range: Control the amount of velocity randomization. Usually a small range
works best, around 10% to 30%.
If velocity is set to 127, and the random range is set to 20%, notes would
randomly vary between a maximum velocity of 127 and a minimum velocity of
102.
Instrument Hints: Customize appearance of the Hint line with Note Name,
MIDI Note Number and Computer Key.
Show: “Show All Instruments” shows all instruments in the drum window.
“Show Used Instruments” displays the basic trap kit, but does not display any
extra instruments unless they are used in a song. The drum window is cleared
each time Play or Stop is pressed.
Chapter 10: Built-in Drums
143
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
The StyleMaker
Overview of the StyleMaker
The StyleMaker is the section of the program that allows you to create brand
new styles or edit existing styles. This is done by recording patterns for each of
the Drums, Bass, Piano, Guitar, and Strings parts. If you don't want an
instrument in a style, you don't need to record any patterns for it.
The simplest style consists of 1 pattern each for the instruments that you want in
the style. If you like, you can use options available to you called “masks.”
Masks are options that you set for a pattern to specify when you want the pattern
to be played. There is a list of masks below.
Masks Available for Patterns
Complex styles can be made allowing patterns to be recorded that are played
only at certain times. These are referred to as masks.
Substyle masks
Substyle A or Substyle B
Chord duration masks
On chords lasting 1,2,4 or 8 beats
Bar masks
On certain bar numbers
Beat masks
On certain beat numbers
Chord masks
On certain types of chords
Roman Numeral masks
On certain Roman numerals (e.g., II chord)
144
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
Next interval masks
Only when next chord of song is certain
interval (e.g., up a fourth)
But the StyleMaker is loaded with options and features that allow your styles to
grow in complexity and number of patterns. For example, it is possible to input
up to 600 patterns in a given style.
In addition, patterns can be classified by many ways allowing them to be played
only at appropriate times. For example, patterns can be given varying lengths or
can be assigned to certain types of chords or only to be played on even or odd
number bars and many others. We believe that the StyleMaker satisfies both the
need to create simple styles with repetitive patterns and the ability to create
complex styles intelligently.
To create a style you will be creating Bass / Piano / Guitar / Strings patterns (in
the key of C) and Drum patterns. Once made, the styles are saved to disk and
are then ready to be used by the program for playing any song in the selected
“User style.” Styles end up as files with a .STY extension, different from song
files, which have a .SG? or a .MG?extension.
The StyleMaker has been designed to be as flexible as possible. A simple style
would consist of three patterns (one each for bass, drums, and piano) but more
complex styles are created by using more patterns.
The styles consist of two substyles, “a” and “b.” Typically, the ‘A” sub-style
would be the more “laid back” portion of the style such as a verse or in the case
of a Jazz Swing style, a two-beat part. The “b” substyle would be a Chorus
section (bridge) or “Swing” part in reference to a typical Jazz Swing style.
On the StyleMaker page, you'll see rows of dots that line up with their respective
instruments / substyle / length in beats / etc. These are locations for your
patterns that you'll be recording. In order to create a Style, you'll need a MIDI
instrument of some sort (keyboard, MIDI guitar, drum controllers) with a MIDI
Out port. Styles are made by entering Drum, Bass, and/or Piano patterns in the
desired style.
Drum patterns:
-
Are entered in step time, Tap mode, and Real Time from a typical drum
programming screen (grid).
-
Are always entered as 1-bar patterns (longer patterns may be chained
together using BAR MASKS – described below).
The drum patterns are entered from the drum screen in 4 sections (these 4
sections appear when you click on the drum button).
A patterns
This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the “a” substyle.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
145
B patterns
This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the “b” substyle.
Fills
This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the “a” substyle.
Endings
This row is for endings. Endings are 2 bars (2 patterns of 1 bar
each).
Tip: If you are making a simple style, you only need to use the top row (“a” patterns).
Bass / Piano / Guitar / Strings patterns:
-
Are played in real time from a MIDI keyboard, MIDI guitar, etc. by
clicking on [Rec] or typing “r” with the cursor placed on the first dot of the
A or B section of the desired instrument starting with 8 Beat.
-
Are played in based on a C7 chord (C E G Bb) though all 12 notes may be
used.
The patterns for Bass/Piano/Guitar/Strings are classified by the length of the
pattern, i.e., the number of notes that the chord lasts without a change of chord.
Click on the Piano/Guitar/Strings buttons to toggle
between each instrument’s A/B recording sections.
You get to the instrument screen by mouse clicking
on the instrument name button.
For example, click on the Bass button and you will see similar to the following:
The important rows are indicated with an asterisk *, meaning that if you are
making a simple style you'll only have to use these rows. The “a” and “b” refer
to the “a” and “b” substyles found in Band-in-a-Box. The numbers 1, 2, 4, 8
refer to the length of the recorded patterns in terms of number of beats. For
example, a 2 bar pattern would be = 8 beats.
Explanation of the numbers on the StyleMaker screen.
The StyleMaker screen is full of patterns, mostly empty indicated by a period (.). When a
pattern has been recorded, there is a number in place of the period for example (5).
These numbers indicate whether a pattern has been recorded at the location.
146
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
A period indicates no pattern and a number from 1 - 9 indicates that a pattern has been
recorded with the actual value corresponding to the desired weight the pattern is to be
given relative to other similar patterns. Patterns that you don't want to hear very often in
the style are given low weights. Usually you will use weights in the range of 0 - 8 where
0 = no pattern recorded
1 - 8= pattern recorded
9 = special weight that is really given a much higher weight internally by the program. A
pattern with a weight of 9 will always be played (if not masked out by other options).
“a” and “b” refer to the 2 substyles available in the Band-in-a-Box program.
Explanation of the pattern lengths 8, 4, 2, and 1 beat.
You may ask, “Why would I need to have different pattern lengths in a style?”
Whenever Band-in-a-Box encounters a chord change in a song it will begin to
playback a new pattern, starting at the beginning of the pattern. It firsts scans
the chord to see how long that chord is going to last without a chord change.
For example, let's look at these chords:
| 1a Dm7
| 2 G7
C6 | 3 FMAJ7
| 4 (These chords are in substyle “a.”)
When Band-in-a-Box is playing back your style, it starts by looking at the Dm7
chord, and counts that it lasts four beats before the next chord change to a G7
chord. It then looks to the style that you have created and sees if you have any
patterns created in the A 4 beat line – if so, you will get an appropriate pattern
that you have recorded for chords lasting four beats.
Note: If you don't want to classify patterns according to this method (don't worry), you can
just record all of your patterns on the A 8 beat line. When Band-in-a-Box sees that you
haven't any 4 beat patterns it will choose an eight beat pattern and then only use the first
four beats of it.
Then when Band-in-a-Box encounters the G7 chord, it sees that it lasts two
notes before the next chord change. So Band-in-a-Box will look for any A 2
beat patterns. There is tremendous advantage to being able to record different
length patterns. Eight beat patterns might be blank for the first four beats for
example; a situation that could not apply for four beat patterns or the entire
pattern would be blank!
Here is another example of chords with the durations of the chords displayed for
you underneath:
4 bar e.g.
|F
| Bb
C7
| F6
|
|
chord duration 4
2
2
8
Patterns may be entered for chord durations of 1, 2, 4, and 8 notes. The Bandin-a-Box program sorts out everything else about determining the length of the
chord durations in the song and combining lengths for unusual lengths (3 = 2+ 1
etc.).
So now we know what the rows are for: they are for patterns of different lengths
and different substyles (A and B). The columns across the screen are used to
contain multiple variations of similar sounding patterns. The program will
randomly pick between the similar patterns on playback. The number that is
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
147
recorded and displayed on the screen refers to the weight assigned to that
pattern. Normally if you have three similar patterns with equal weight they will
be picked equally, but if you assign lower or higher weights in the range 0 - 8,
you can fine tune how often patterns are played.
Note: Normally weights are in the range 0 - 8. A weight of 9 may also be assigned when
you have a pattern that only occurs under certain conditions, but you want to ensure that
whenever that condition occurs that the pattern will always be picked.
The Bass and Piano / Guitar / Strings patterns are always recorded in two bar
chunks regardless of the chord duration. If a shorter chord duration is entered,
the remainder of the pattern is ignored. Patterns are also entered for the A and B
substyles.
Drum patterns are not of variable duration like the Bass and Piano patterns. The
Drum patterns are always one bar long. Longer patterns than one bar may be
chained together using bar masks (see below). When you record a new pattern
(Bass / Piano or Drums), a dialog box will be displayed with several options, all
set to defaults of 0. If you are making a simple style, or if you don't understand
all the options, just leave them at their default settings. When you record a
pattern with all the default settings, it is called a generic pattern. Generic
patterns may be picked at any time by the program.
Playback of patterns in the StyleMaker is done from the StyleMaker screen:
button plays pattern back exactly as played.
button plays pattern back as Band-in-a-Box would, e.g., on a
specific chord set by the user from a menu.
Stopping Playback:
Clicking the mouse button or pressing the < Spacebar > stops playback of the
pattern.
Erasing Patterns:
Patterns are erased by assigning a weight of zero to the pattern. Type a 0 at the pattern.
NOTE: All user styles are entered in 4/4 time.
The Band-in-a-Box Program is capable of playing back in any time signature
(via the Bar Settings option on the Edit Menu or Option+B) so user defined
waltz styles would be made as 4/4 but played as 3/4.
Editing Existing Styles
The easiest way to become familiar with the StyleMaker is to start with an
existing style and modify it. In this tutorial, we will describe several ways to
edit an existing style. These include:
148
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
-
changing patches saved with style
-
adding/editing drum patterns to a style
-
copying and pasting drum patterns
-
recording additional bass patterns
-
adding strings to a style by importing strings from another style
Let's edit the Light Rock Style, which is called ZZLITROK.STY.
1. To select a style for editing from the main screen:
Mouse click over top of the style on the Title window. This area on the main
screen indicates the style that is currently in memory. If you want to edit the
current style, (in this example it is ZZLITROK.STY) then choose either User |
Edit Existing User Style or press Option + Y.
If you want to edit a different style then load a different style from the
StylePicker, or by selecting the Load Style From Disk… option on the User
menu, or press +u, or select a style from either the Style menu or the STY
menu.
2. The StyleMaker window is then opened and you will see the display of the
style prepared for editing.
The StyleMaker shows you patterns that have been recorded for Drums and Bass
constantly. If you would like to see the patterns recorded for Piano, Guitar, or
Strings, then select the appropriate instrument button to view them.
The currently selected instrument for Piano/Bass/Strings is
indicated by the highlighted instrument button. In the diagram,
you'll notice that the Piano is the current instrument. Clicking
the mouse on a different instrument button will change the
instruments.
The StyleMaker begins by displaying the Drums and Bass. Let's have a closer
look at the Drums.
The ZZLITROK.STY Drums screen will look similar to this:
You will notice that there are 4 rows of drum patterns:
A Pattern is the row to record drum patterns for the “a” substyle.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
149
B pattern is the row to record for the “b” substyle.
Fills are recorded on the Fills row.
Endings are recorded on the Endings row. (2 consecutive patterns of 1 bar.)
Let's have a closer look at the A Pattern row.
Each of the numbers represents a drum pattern that has been already recorded.
There are 8 patterns that have been recorded on this line. The numbers
themselves are called weights. The weights can be from 1 to 8 (a weight of 9 is
a special case explained below). Most of the patterns have weights of 5, which
is the default. Assigning a higher or lower weight will cause that pattern to be
played more or less often relative to the other patterns. The 2 patterns with a
weight of 2 will be played less often than the patterns with weights of 5.
Use of a weight of 9 on one of the patterns is a special case. Patterns with a
weight of 9 will always be played instead of any other patterns on the same row.
These patterns usually have other options associated with them to ensure they
are played under certain circumstances only. For example the pattern on this
row has an option set of “Bar Mask = post fill” which means it will be the bar
after a drum fill. In this case, the pattern has a Crash cymbal on beat 1. This
pattern will always be played when the song is at the first bar of a new part
(which is the bar after a drum fill).
You can examine the options for any pattern by selecting the
pattern by mouse clicking on it, and then clicking on the [EDIT]
button. Move around the screen to different patterns by either using
the cursor keys or mouse clicking on the desired pattern.
Let's examine the Drum pattern by pressing the [REC] button. This
opens the Drum Editor window. This screen allows you to create
or Edit drum patterns in step time.
There are 16 columns, representing 1 bar of 16th notes. The numbers on this
screen represent velocities from 0 to 127. Using the bottom row of the computer
keyboard i.e. the XCVBNM,. / keys is the fastest way to put in commonly used
velocities, or by selecting the various commonly used velocity buttons at the
bottom right of the Drum Pattern Entry screen. You can also just type in the
number that you want. Try typing in some new drum notes. Press the [PLAY]
button to audition them.
Let's create a new drum fill.
-
Move to an empty location on the “Fills” line.
-
Press [REC] to open the Drum Pattern Entry screen.
-
Type a drum pattern in the drum grid.
-
Save the pattern by pressing [EXIT] to exit the Drum Editor.
150
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
-
Accept the generic settings in the Drum Pattern Recorded dialog box.
You will see your new pattern on the Fills line as represented by a weight
number.
Let's use COPY/PASTE to simplify creating a new drum pattern.
-
To make another fill, move to an existing fill.
-
Choose the [COPY] button to copy that drum fill to the clipboard.
-
Move to an empty pattern.
-
Choose the [PASTE] button to paste in the previous drum fill.
-
Now press [REC] to launch the Drum Pattern Entry screen and step edit
the drum fill. You will only need to change a few notes of the fill to make a
variation of the one you have copied.
Save the style by pressing the [SAVE] button. Save allows you to rename the
style so you don't affect the original ZZLITROK.STY.
Change the Patches that are assigned to the Style.
Each style can have patches assigned to it. For example if you want the style's
Piano part to use a Rhodes piano, you can select the piano patch of 5, which is
the General MIDI number for the Rhodes Electric Piano.
-
Press the PATCH button.
-
This displays the Misc. Style Settings dialog box.
-
Select the [Set Patches...] button.
-
You will then see a dialog box allowing you to type in patches you would
like for the style. If you don't need a specific patch, use 0 for no change of
patch number.
Let's add Strings to the Style.
There are 2 ways to do this.
1.
You could move to the strings part (by clicking on the strings button) and
then record the strings patterns.
- or -
2.
The easiest way is to import strings from another style that already has
strings. This allows you to use existing string patterns. For example the
Miami Pop style has a nice strings part.
Let's import the “Miami Pop” strings into our style.
-
Choose the [LOAD] button.
-
Select the ZZMIAMI.STY style from the file dialog.
-
Select the [Strings] button to display the String patterns for this style.
-
Select an 8-beat String pattern to copy and press the [COPY] button.
-
Choose the [LOAD] button.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
151
-
Select the ZZLITROK.STY style.
-
Press the OPEN button to open this style.
-
Choose an empty 8-beat “b” String pattern (because that is where the String
pattern was recorded in) and press the [PASTE] button.
-
Press the [SAVE] button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings.
The strings will play in the “b” substyle only, because that's how they were
made in the Miami Pop style.
You could now import the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY.STY for example,
using the steps above. It is quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by
importing instruments from other styles.
Let's Record some new bass patterns.
Note: If you are not able to play patterns in real time (“live”), then you shouldn't record
these Bass, Piano, Guitar, or Strings patterns. You cannot enter them in step time. Only
Drum patterns may be entered in step time. If you can't enter them in real time, import an
instrument from existing styles as described above.
Recording a Bass Pattern
Move the highlighted cell to an unused Bass pattern. If you're recording a
pattern lasting 8 beats, record this on the top line “A 8 beat.” This pattern will
be used when the song has chords lasting 8 beats or more without a chord
change.
Press the [REC] button to record the bass pattern. You will need to wait during
a 2 bar lead-in. Then you record the 2 bar pattern.
Play the pattern on a C7 chord. You can use all 12 notes; just play a pattern that
you would have normally played in the song if the song were on a C7 chord (C
E G Bb). When you're finished recording the pattern, you'll see a dialog box
listing all of the options available. Just accept all of the defaults by pressing the
[OK] button.
Press the [SAVE] button to save your new style.
Press the [EXIT] button to close the StyleMaker window and exit. Make sure
that you have saved the style first, otherwise edits will be lost.
Creating New Styles
Making Drum Patterns
There are 2 screens in the StyleMaker associated with making drum patterns.
1. The StyleMaker screen with drum patterns.
2. The Drum Pattern Editor, allowing step editing of patterns.
1. The StyleMaker screen with drum patterns looks like this:
152
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
The screen will look like this. The solid box indicates the currently selected
pattern. Empty patterns are indicated by a (.), i.e., patterns that have not been
recorded yet. If a pattern has been recorded there will be a number in place of
the (.) indicating the weight of the pattern.
The 4 rows are for the different types of patterns, “a” substyle, “b” substyle,
Fills and 2 bar Endings.
Drum Pattern Entry
Drum Pattern Entry screen is where the Drum patterns are made
To enter the Drum Editor: With the highlight bar on a pattern on the drum area
of the StyleMaker screen press the REC button to record the pattern in Step
Time.
You'll now be in the Drum Pattern Entry screen. There are 16 rows across,
indicating 4 beats with 4 divisions per beat.
Changing Timebase of Drum Pattern
Change the timebase to 12 by clicking the mouse on the [Timebase] button.
This allows for drum patterns in 3/4 time. The program will ignore the 4th
column of each beat. [Timebase 12] will then be displayed in the timebase
button.
Moving around the Drum Editor Screen
Move around the screen with cursor keys, or mouse click. The black flashing
highlight bar indicates where you are. The different drum instruments are
named along the left side and the 4 beats are displayed along the top.
Tempo Changes
Tempo changes are done using the [TEMPO] button or press the [
and ] keys from the main Stylemaker screen.
Entering notes onto the drum editor screen.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
153
A typical pattern may look like this:
This pattern is in a timebase of 12, you see 4 beats with 4 divisions per beat.
(In a Timebase =12, only the first three divisions of each beat are accessible.)
The numbers are velocities. Move around the Drum Pattern screen and type in
the numbers as above. These are velocities and should range between 0 and
127. The fastest way to put the numbers onto the screen is to use the hot keys
on the bottom row of the typewriter keyboard - XCVBNM,. or the velocity
buttons, 0, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 127 at the bottom right of the
Drum Pattern Entry screen.
Using Alternate Drum Notes
What are alternate notes? Alternate notes can be entered for any note. This tells
Band-in-a-Box to randomly choose a different note to the one specified. For
example:
-
you might want a note to be a closed high hat 80% of the time, and an open
high hat 20% of the time.
-
you might want a note to be high conga 60% and low conga 40% of the
time, or
-
high tom 30% of the time and NO note the other 70%
This allows one drum pattern to sound like many, because it will be played
different ways depending on which of the notes are picked.
How to put in an alternate note:
From the Drum Pattern Entry screen, press the [EDIT] button.
This displays the Alternate Drum Notes dialog box.
Select the Alternate Drum
Note type, such as Open
High Hat or Bass Drum,
from the Alternate Note
drop down menu. When
you exit the box, you will
see that the box has a
border indicating that an
alternate note is located
there.
Playing the Drum Patterns
Play the drum pattern by pressing the [PLAY] button.
154
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
Stop playback by pressing the [STOP] button or the < Spacebar >.
Press the [PLAY] button again to hear the pattern again if you have made
changes.
When the pattern is sounding like you want, press the [EXIT] button.
Drum Pattern Options
Relative Weight (USUAL SETTING =5)
Relative Weight is the number that you assign to the pattern from 1 - 9.
Numbers from 1-8 indicate how often you want the pattern to be played in
relation to the other patterns on the same row.
A weight of 9 is a special setting that ensures that the pattern will ALWAYS be
played. Patterns assigned a weight of 9 usually have other options set which
instruct the pattern to only be played at certain times (bar after a drum fill for
example).
Playback Bar Mask (USUAL SETTING =0)
Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play.
The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker. Bar 1 is the first
bar after a part marker for example.
Bar mask setting of 0 is the default. This lets the pattern be played at any time.
Other bar mask settings:
1.
pattern played at odd number bars only 1, 3, 5, 7, 9...
2.
pattern played at even bars only 2, 4, 6, 8, 10...
3.
pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar (3, 7, 11, 15..)
4.
pattern played on 4th of 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, 20...)
5.
pattern played on 5th of 8 (5, 13, 21...)
6.
pattern played on 6th of 8 (6, 14, 22...)
7.
pattern played on 7th of 8 (7, 15, 23...)
8.
pattern played on 8th of 8 (8, 16, 24...)
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
155
9.
PRE-FILL special value - refers to the bar before a fill
10. FILL refers to the bar of a fill (not applicable to drums because there is a special row
for drum fills).
11. POST-FILL refers to the bar after a fill (same as the first bar after a part marker).
Drum Fill on Substyle (USUAL SETTING = Any)
This setting is only relevant on the Drum Fills line. It lets you specify if you
want the drum fill to be used on the “a” substyle, the “b” substyle, or either. The
default setting is Any.
Late Triplets (USUAL SETTING =0)
This is only relevant in drum patterns with timebase =12 (triplet feel). If you
want the 3rd triplet to be played late (as is usually done in slow jazz style), then
set a number from 0 - 11. Default is 0 (not late at all). A typical setting for a
slow triplet style is triplets late =5 (the units are 120/beat).
Now let’s make the ending drum pattern.
Endings are 2 bars long. In the case of the drums, this is done by 2 consecutive
1 bar patterns on the ending row. Move to the Endings row. Input a 1 bar
pattern in the first column and then another 1 bar pattern in the 2nd. These 2
patterns are the ending patterns so you should make the 2nd pattern an ending
drum pattern typically with a crash cymbal on beat 3 for example.
Making Bass Patterns
Bass patterns are recorded live from a MIDI keyboard. If you can't play in real
time, or if you don't have a MIDI keyboard you'll have to import these
instruments from other styles (as we will be doing with the strings).
The Bass Screen
If you're making a simple bass pattern you'll only need to record pattern(s) on
the A 8 beat row (the top row). These patterns will be chosen for every chord,
regardless of the length. But if you want the style to play different patterns
when the song is encountering chords that last 1, 2, 3, or 4 notes, you should
record separate patterns on these rows.
Recording a Bass Pattern
Move to the top row of the bass area, in column 1. Press the [REC] button.
This will begin the recording of the bass pattern. You will hear a 2 bar lead-in
and then you record a 2 bar bass pattern. For your bass pattern, you will play a
156
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
pattern based on a C7 chord. You can use all 12 notes, but should just play the
pattern as you would if the chord was a C7. You should center the bass patterns
around MIDI note 48 (C3).
Tip: If you are uncertain what to play, edit another style that comes with the program by
pressing the [LOAD] button and selecting another style - you can then play the bass
patterns by pressing the [PLAY] button to see what patterns we used to make it, and
imitate them in your style.
After you have recorded the bass pattern, a dialog box with options will appear.
This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattern to be
played back in the song. These are called masks. Usually you can just accept
all the defaults, which allow the pattern to be played at any time.
Bass Pattern Options
Relative Weight Usual Setting = 5
Set this number higher/lower if you want the pattern to be played more/less
often than the other patterns on the same row. This number is also displayed on
the main StyleMaker screen.
A setting of 9 (always) is a special setting that instructs the pattern to always be
played instead of the other patterns on the same row. These patterns always
have other options set which specify the times that this pattern would be eligible
to be played.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
157
Playback Bar Mask Usual Setting = 0
Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play.
The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker, and range from 1-8.
Bar 1 is the first bar after a part marker for example. Other bar mask settings:
1.
pattern played at odd number bars only 1, 3, 5, 7, 9...
2.
pattern played at even bars only 2, 4, 6, 8, 10...
3.
pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar (3, 7, 11, 15...)
4.
pattern played on 4th of 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, 20...)
5.
pattern played on 5th of 8 (5, 13, 21...)
6.
pattern played on 6th of 8 (6, 14, 22...)
7.
pattern played on 7th of 8 (7, 15, 23...)
8.
pattern played on 8th of 8 (8, 16, 24...)
Special bar masks
1.
PRE-FILL special value - refers to the bar before a fill.
2.
FILL refers to the bar of a fill (this allows you to put in “bass fills” for
example).
3.
POST-FILL refers to the bar after a fill (same as the first bar after a part
marker).
Playback Beat Mask Usual Setting = 0
Set the beat mask to a beat from 1-4, if you want the pattern to only be played
on certain beat numbers. 1= Beat 1, 2= Beat 2, 3= Beat 3, 4= Beat 4.
Roman Numeral Mask Usual Setting = 0
If you have a pattern that should only be played on the I chord or the IV chord
(of the key), you can use these Roman Numeral Masks. This setting is rarely
used.
Chord Type Usual Setting = Any Chord
This setting is very useful. This allows you to record patterns that will only
work on certain types of chords. For example, you can record a specific riff that
will only work on a minor 7th chord. You then play the pattern on a Cmin 7
(not a C7). There are chord types for most types of chords.
Interval - Next Chord Usual Setting = Any Interval
This setting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord
is a certain interval away. For example, you can record a bass pattern that is
walking up a fourth and then assign an Interval of Up 4th so that the pattern
would only be played if you're going up a 4th.
Half Octave Range Usual Setting = Full Octave
This is a new setting in the StyleMaker. Usually a pattern will be picked on any
of the 12 roots. You can select a smaller range, either A to D, or Eb to Ab. In
this case, the pattern would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that
range.
158
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
Play Pushed - how often % Usual Setting = 0 %
#ticks to push pattern Usual Setting = 0
Pushed patterns are patterns that are played before the chord begins. Jazz styles
typically use pushed patterns for the piano. Patterns are recorded in the normal
way (non pushed) and then you assign the % of time and amount (in ticks, 120
ticks = 1 beat) to push the pattern. The pattern only plays pushed in the song
(not in the StyleMaker).
Ok To Use Macro Notes (Bass) Usual Setting = No
Bass Macros are special notes that you record. When they are played back they
are replaced by a function,
List of Bass Macro Notes
-
Note number 72 (C): Pop Walking Note(s).
On playback, the note number 72 will be replaced by intelligent notes walking in a
Pop/Country mode to the next chord. Maximum 4 walking notes per pattern.
-
Note number 76 (E): Note a semitone below Root of Next Chord.
-
Note number 77 (F): Root Of Next Chord.
-
Note number 78 (F#): Note a semitone ABOVE Root of Next Chord.
-
Note number 79 (G): Best Fifth (a Fifth above or below the Root depending on how
high the root is. Also stays on the root if in a slash chord (C7 /E).
Remember to get Bass Macros Working you must:
-
Hit the right note number (you may be out by an octave).
-
Check the “OK To Use Macro Notes” box.
-
Playback the pattern with the [CHORD] button. (The [PLAY] button gives you an
“as played” playback with the strange sounding high macro notes.)
Making Piano, Guitar, and Strings Patterns
Piano, Guitar and Strings are all considered together because they have all the
same options available. They, like the Bass patterns, are recorded live from a
MIDI keyboard. If you can't play in real time, or if you don't have a MIDI
keyboard, you'll have to import these instruments from other styles (as we'll be
doing with the Strings).
In this section we will refer to Piano patterns, but this information applies
equally well to Guitar and Strings patterns.
Moving to the Piano Pattern Screen
Move to the Piano area by mouse clicking on the [Piano] button.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
159
If you're making a simple piano pattern you'll only need to record pattern(s) on
the A 8 beat row (the top row). These patterns will get chosen for every
chord, regardless of the length. But if you want the style to play different
patterns when the song is encountering chords that last 1, 2, 3, or 4 beats, you
should record separate patterns on these rows.
Recording Piano Patterns
Move to the top row of the piano area, in column 1. Press the [REC] button.
This will begin the recording of the piano pattern. You will hear a 2 bar lead-in,
and then you record a 2 bar piano pattern. For your piano pattern, you will play
a pattern based on a C7 chord. You can use all 12 notes, but should just play the
pattern as you would if the chord was a C7.
Tip: If you are uncertain what to play, press the LOAD button and edit another style that
comes with the program - you can then play the piano patterns by the pressing the PLAY
button to see what patterns we used to make it, and imitate them in your style.
After you have recorded the piano pattern, a dialog box with options will appear.
This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattern to be
played back in the song. These are called masks. Usually you can just accept
all the defaults, which allow the pattern to be played at any time.
Playback Weight Usual Setting = 5
Set this number higher/lower if you want the pattern to be played more/less
160
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
often than the other patterns on the same row. This number is also displayed on
the main StyleMaker screen.
A setting of 9 (always) is a special setting that instructs the pattern to always be
played instead of the other patterns on the same row. These patterns always
have other options set which specify the times that this pattern would be eligible
to be played.
Playback Bar Mask Usual Setting =0
Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of the song the pattern will play.
The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker, and range from 1-8.
Bar 1 is the first bar after a part marker for example.
Other bar mask settings:
1.
pattern played at odd number bars only 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,...
2.
pattern played at even bars only 2, 4, 6, 8, 10...
3.
pattern played on 3rd of 4 bar (3, 7, 11, 15..)
4.
pattern played on 4th of 4 (4, 8, 12, 16, 20...)
5.
pattern played on 5th of 8 (5, 13, 21...)
6.
pattern played on 6th of 8 (6, 14, 22...)
7.
pattern played on 7th of 8 (7, 15, 23...)
8.
pattern played on 8th of 8 (8, 16, 24...)
Special bar masks:
1.
PRE-FILL special value - refers to the bar before a fill.
2.
FILL refers to the bar of a fill (this allows you to put in “piano fills” for
example.)
3.
POST-FILL refers to the bar after a fill (same as the first bar after a part
marker)
Playback Beat Mask Usual Setting=0
Set the beat mask to a beat from 1-4, if you want the pattern to only be played
on certain beat numbers. 1= Beat 1, 2= Beat 2, 3= Beat 3, 4= Beat 4.
Roman Numerals Usual Setting = 0
If you have a pattern that should only be played on the I chord or the IV chord
(of the key), you can use these Roman Numeral Masks. This setting is rarely
used.
Chord Type Usual Setting = Any Chord
This setting is very useful. This allows you to record patterns that will only
work on certain types of chords. For example, you can record a specific riff that
will only work on a minor 7th chord. You then play the pattern on a Cmin 7
(not a C7). There are chord types for most types of chords.
Half Octave Range Usual Setting = Full Octave
This is a new setting in the StyleMaker. Usually a pattern will be picked on any
of the 12 roots. You can select a smaller range, either A to D, or Eb to Ab. In
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
161
this case, the pattern would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that
range.
Interval - Chord Usual Setting = Any Interval
This setting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord
is a certain interval away. For example, you can record a bass pattern that is
walking up a fourth and then assign an interval of Up 4th so that the pattern
would only be played if you're going up a 4th.
Play Pattern Pushed - how often % Usual Setting = 0 %
# ticks to push pattern (120 ppq) Usual Setting = 0
Pushed patterns are patterns that are played before the chord begins. Jazz styles
typically are pushed patterns for the piano. Patterns are recorded in the normal
way (non pushed) and then you assign the % of time and amount (in ticks, 120
ticks = 1 beat) to push the pattern. Pushed patterns only play pushed in the song,
not in the StyleMaker.
Use Macro Notes Usual Setting = No
Piano Macros are special notes that you record. When they are played back they
are replaced by a function, as listed below:
List of Piano Macro Notes (same as Guitar/String macro notes)
MIDI Note number 83 B
Pop Chord Diatonic Below
MIDI Note number 84 C
Pop Chord
MIDI Note number 85 C#
Pop Chord Diatonic Above
MIDI Note number 88 E
Jazz Chord Chromatic Below
MIDI Note number 89 F
Jazz Chord
MIDI Note number 90 F#
Jazz Chord Chromatic Above
Remember to get Macro Notes Working you must:
-
Hit the right note number (you may be out by an octave).
-
Check the “Use Macro Notes” box.
-
Playback the Pattern by pressing the [CHORD] button. (Pressing the [PLAY]
button gives you an “as played” playback with the strange sounding high macro
notes.)
Transpose Root Pattern Usual Setting = No
This is a rarely used setting. It only is relevant when voice leading is set to
smooth (see below). It determines where the center of the pattern is considered
to be. If checked, the center of the pattern will be moved to the song's key.
Embellish Pattern Usual Setting = No
If checked, the pattern will be embellished. This is useful in Jazz styles.
Transpose Down Limit Usual Setting = 6
This setting is quite useful. It controls the range that the pattern will be played
over. For example, if the transpose down range is set to = 2 the pattern
162
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
(recorded in C) will be transposed a maximum of 2 semitones down, and
therefore up to 10 semitones up to play all 12 possible roots of the chords.
Type Of Voice Leading Usual Setting = Transpose Only
Transpose Only = C7 chord based
Smooth voice leading
Riff based
The easiest type of voice leading is transpose only. If the notes C E G Bb were played
as a C7 pattern, the Band-in-a-Box would transpose that voicing to a F7 chord as F-A-CEb, which is fine but not very smooth. A more pleasant setting would be smooth voice
leading then the F7 would be voiced automatically as C-Eb-F-A.
Riff based voicing is used when you have recorded a pattern with a melodic riff
in it. This setting ensures that Band-in-a-Box will not try to transform any of the
notes into chord tones.
Chord Selection Dialog Box
This section is accessed by the [CHORD] button. This plays back a pattern on a
specific chord that you choose. You can hear what patterns will sound like in a
style by “trying them out” on certain songs. Macro notes recorded in a pattern
will play their corresponding chords; smooth voice leading is demonstrated etc.
Just choose a chord and then press [OK].
Note: This does not apply to drum patterns, since drum patterns don't play any differently
on different chords.
From within the StyleMaker, press the [PATCH] button. The
Misc. Style Settings dialog box opens, which allows you to set
some miscellaneous settings for the style.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
163
Waltz
If you want to make a Waltz style, check the Waltz checkbox. Then the
StyleMaker will record and play patterns in 3/4 time. The “8 beat row” will
record “6 beat” (2 bar) patterns, the “4 beat” will record 3 beat (1bar) patterns.
The 2 beat and 1 beat still record 2 and 1 beat patterns. The new style is made
as a waltz, and will play with a 3/4 lead-in. There is no need to put a 3/4 time
signature change in bar 1.
You will also notice that any style will play better if set to 3/4 time. This
makes songs like “'Take Five” sound better, which are written as 3/4 + 2/4 bars.
Try out the swing_number9 demo of 5/4 time signature. So, if we haven't made
as Bossa Waltz for example, you can set a time signature of 3/4 in bar 1, and get
a Bossa Waltz.
Pattern Pushing
Patterns can be pushed individually or on instrument basis (random % of time).
Pushes can get a Velocity Boost, so that they are played louder than other
patterns. Usually a setting of 10 is a good boost to give pushes.
# ticks to push: Choose the number ticks for each push to use. 30=16th note,
40 ticks=triplet, 60 = half note.
In this example, the Bass part patterns will be pushed randomly 10% of the time,
in the A substyle, and 20% of time in the B substyle.
Since Rests can be “Shots,” that play a chord on beat 1, the style can define what
instrument to use for this, and at what velocity.
Similarly, each Push is accompanied by a drum stab, and the style can define
what instrument to use and at what velocity.
Set Patches…
The Set Patch and Volume for Style dialog box allows you to assign
instruments to a style including default instrument volumes. When the song is
played back using the style, these patch changes will be sent to your synthesizer
164
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
along with the default instrument volumes. Remember to always use General
MIDI Instrument numbers, not the Patch numbers of your synth, unless you
have a General MIDI synth. If you don't require a specific instrument for the
style, type a 0 for no patch change. The patch changes take effect immediately
in the style, so that when you are recording Bass parts for example, you will
hear the bass patch that you have selected.
Thru Patch
If you set the Thru Patch to other than 0, the instrument that the user plays along
with, using your style, will be the Thru patch that you set. If you're making a
“heavy rock” style, you might want to set the thru patch to be Rock guitar if you
expected that the user would want to always play along on Rock guitar.
Melody Patch
If set to other than 0 all melodies will be played on the specified instrument. If
you're making a “Grover Washington” style for example, you might want any
melodies to be automatically set to Saxophone.
Volumes
You can set a default volume for each instrument in your style. The default
volume is 90. The volume range is 0 - 127.
Importing Patterns into a Style
Importing a pattern into a style is a powerful feature that greatly speeds up the
making of new styles. In the interests of not “re-inventing the wheel” with each
new style, this allows you to import a pattern from another style.
How to Import a Pattern into a Style
A pattern can be copied from one style to another by copying and pasting. The
Miami Pop style has a nice Strings part, in this example we’ll import the Strings
from Miami Pop style into the Light Rock style, ZZLITROK.STY.
Let's import the “Miami Pop” strings into the Light Rock style.
-
Choose the [LOAD] button.
-
Select the ZZMIAMI.STY style from the file dialog.
-
Select the [Strings] button to display the String patterns for this style.
-
Select an 8-beat String pattern to copy and press the [COPY] button.
-
Choose the [LOAD] button.
-
Select the ZZLITROK.STY style.
-
Press the OPEN button to open this style.
-
Choose an empty 8-beat “b” String pattern (because that is where the String
pattern was recorded in) and press the [PASTE] button.
-
Press the [SAVE] button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
165
The strings will play in the “b” substyle only, because that's how they were
made in the Miami Pop style.
You could now import the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY.STY for example,
using the steps above. It is quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by
importing instruments from other styles.
Intelligent Guitar Styles
Would you like to hear some realistic, accurate MIDI guitar from Band-in-a-Box
styles, with strumming, picking, and accurate fret fingering? You'll get it with
Version 11! “Guitar Styles” are styles that show strummed and picked guitar
parts accurately on the guitar fretboard, and they sound great. These styles also
play accurate guitar voicings, in your choice of Pop, Jazz, Country, or Folk
Guitar chording. There's even a “walking guitar comping” style that plays guitar
that emulates the famous “Basie Big Band” Jazz style. The “Guitar Styles” play
like any regular style, and when you view them on the virtual guitar fretboard
you can see exactly which strings and frets are used so it is a great learning tool
as well.
Information about Guitar Styles for Playback.
Guitar Styles are identified by the exclamation point (!) in the style name. This
is not a requirement, but is usually present in the style name. Guitar styles
require Version 11 of Band-in-a-Box. With an earlier version the guitar track
will play wrong notes. For the typical user who is just using the styles for
playback and isn't making their own styles there's not much that you need to
know about the styles, since they play normally like other Band-in-a-Box styles.
You can see which tracks have intelligent guitar parts by looking at the title
window of the Guitar fretboard, when the track is highlighted. If it is a guitar
style track, it will say [Guitar voicings] after the name of the track. The usual
track that has the intelligent guitar styles is of course the Guitar part. Some of
the styles have more than one guitar, so the Piano and/or Strings part might also
have an intelligent guitar part. In these cases, you can also view the guitar on
those tracks.
The styles can be set to use different types of voicings for guitar. For example,
there are Jazz, Pop and Folk (open position) voicings. Also, some of the styles
allow the guitar to play advanced chords and inversions. Some of the styles play
chord patterns, so the chord in the song might be F7, but the guitar plays a
“walking-chord” pattern of F7, Cm7/G, Abdim, F7/A on each beat. There can
be “finger-picking” styles that have a lowest note alternate between root and 5th.
Guitar parts use channels 11 to 16 for the notes, corresponding to strings 1 to 6
of the guitar. When the notes are output to MIDI, they are re-channeled to the
Guitar channel, so that it only uses 1 channel. When you make a MIDI file, the
notes will all be written on the single guitar channel. Some other sequencers
166
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
(e.g., PowerTracks Pro for Windows ) will recognize guitar parts on all 6
channels, so if you want to write the MIDI file from an intelligent guitar style,
you can set Band-in-a-Box to do this from the Edit | Preferences… “Write
Guitar part on 6 channels” option.
As previously mentioned, you don't need to be aware of the details of how this is
done; you just play the styles as usual.
Let's Examine the Intelligent Guitar Styles
Load in the song! Freddie.MGU from the “Songs” folder. This is a demo song
for the style! Freddie.STY. The exclamation point (!) in the name of a style is a
convention to indicate that the style is an “intelligent guitar style.” This means
that the patterns on the guitar part will play with correct guitar voicings on the
fretboard.
Play the !Freddie.MGU song.
Open the Guitar window
and click on the [G] button to
view the Guitar track on the
guitar fretboard.
As the song plays, you'll see and hear the guitar played on the fretboard using
correct Jazz voicings. For some chords, you'll notice that the guitar plays
different voicings on each beat in a walking pattern. For example, on an F7
chord lasting 4 beats, the guitar might play “F7, Gm7, Abdim, and F7/A,” with
each chord lasting one beat, just as a professional Jazz guitarist might do.
The !Freddie.MGU style uses 3 note chord voicings in order to emphasize the
lower range and to enhance the percussive rhythm effect. Since in these cases
the guitarist is usually fingering the 4th note and muting it, if you want to see
what the 4th note of the voicing would be you can set this option by pressing the
[Settings] button in the Guitar window and checking the box for “Show muted
note of guitar style comping” in the Guitar Settings dialog.
Note: Remember that for any style you see with an exclamation point (!) in the style
name (an intelligent guitar style) you can view and hear the guitar part played on the
guitar fretboard as described above.
The Harmony Maker
The Harmony Maker editing module allows you to create (or edit) your own
harmonies. This can be used in the program to harmonize melodies, solos, or
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
167
live playing on the Thru channel. Sophisticated options control usage of passing
harmonies (diatonic, dominant approach and chromatic), drop octave voicings
(e.g. drop 2), octave doubling, patch selection, and more. An unlimited number
of harmonies can be created and can be saved to disk as harmonies files.
Changes in harmonies can be heard “live” as a song is playing.
This screen allows you to design a harmony.
This harmony can be used in the future for the melody or the thru harmony part.
Each harmony can use up to 3 channels, Harmony Channel A, B, and C.
If your harmony only has one instrument, then you will use Channel A for all
the voices. If your harmony uses Flute and Bass, then you could use Flute on
Channel A, and Bass on Channel B.
Let's make the Harmony called Shearing Quintet. This is illustrated above. The
Shearing Quintet was a famous Jazz quintet with a distinctive sound that
consisted of:
-
Piano playing a 4-part harmony with the melody doubled one octave below.
-
Vibes doubling the melody.
-
Electric Guitar doubling the melody one octave below.
OK, we'll make this harmony by using Piano as Channel A, Vibes as Channel B,
Guitar as Channel C. Let's start with the Piano.
Let's hear our Shearing harmony playing as we develop it. To do this, we need a
song with a melody to be playing before we enter the Harmony Maker. So let's
168
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
exit the Harmony Maker, and start a song with a melody playing (like Old Folks
at Home.mgu). Now go back into the Harmony Maker.
Voices
You'll see the voices down the left side of the dialog box.
Mel is the melody.
Voice 2 is a chord tone below the melody.
Voice 3 is 2 chord tones below the melody.
Voice 4 is 3 chord tones below the melody.
Voice 5 (rarely used) is an additional chord tone, usually
the 9th or 11th in the scale.
Mel2 and Mel3 are used to double the melody.
For the Shearing Quintet harmony:
The Piano is 4-part harmony, so it will use voice 1, 2, 3, and 4 on Channel A.
The Vibes will double the melody, so will use the Mel2 voice.
The Guitar will double the melody, so will use the Mel3 voice.
Settings for Each Voice
Channel is described above. A 1-instrument harmony will use Channel A only.
Additional instruments can use Channel B and C.
Note: These channels are set to numbers in the Harmony Channels dialog box, available
in the M | MIDI Settings… dialog box.
For the Shearing Quintet harmony, we will set the Piano to Channel A, the
Vibes to B, and the Guitar to C.
Octave
This allows the harmony to “drop down” or “go up” by a number of octaves.
This octave change will only happen in a certain range, as chosen in the Low
and High settings.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
169
For example, in the Shearing Quintet harmony, we want the 2nd voice of the
Piano part to drop down an octave when the melody note is higher than MIDI
note 68 (the Ab above middle C). So when the melody is higher than this, the
harmony will become a “drop 2” voicing.
There is also an Overall Harmony Octave setting, available by pressing the
[More…] button that changes the octave of the entire harmony.
O. Double (Octave Double)
This setting lets you double any voice. Usually you want to do this by doubling
an octave below (i.e. octave =-1), but you can set the octave from -2 to +2. (The
doubling will always be on the same channel, if you want a different instrument
to double the voice, then use the Melody Doubling Voices.)
For the Shearing Quintet harmony, the only voice that needs a doubling like this
is the Piano melody, so we'll set this to = -1 on mel (the melody voice).
V. Boost (Velocity Boost)
This allows you to increase or decrease the velocity (loudness) of each voice, to
make the voice stand out more or less in the harmony. Default =0.
For the Shearing Harmony, we set the Melody to a boost of 10, and the vibes
and guitar to a negative boost of (-5, and -20). This makes the piano stand out,
and the vibes and guitar quieter.
The Patches setting at the bottom allows you to assign a patch to the harmony.
If you set “No Patch change” the harmony won't change the patch. This is a
useful setting for making a generic harmony that doesn't change the patch of the
Melody or Thru channel for example.
For the Shearing Quintet harmony, we will set the patches as follows:
Channel A: Piano
Channel B: Vibes
Channel C: Guitar
When we have made changes to the harmony, we
will hear these changes on the harmony channel. Important note: You need to
press the UPDATE button after you've made any changes for the changes
to take effect.
You make Copy a Harmony to the ClipBoard, and then move to a new harmony
and PASTE the harmony to the new location.
For example, if you want to make a harmony similar to the Shearing Quintet
harmony, choose [Copy], move to a new harmony, and choose [Paste]. Then
170
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
rename that harmony “Shearing - modified” and you can make changes to it
(such as using different instruments).
You should never have to press these [Save] buttons since the harmony is saved
automatically for you. All of the 256 harmonies are saved in a single.har file
called default.har. If you have run out of harmonies, you can start a new
harmonies file by pressing the [SaveAs]. For example, if you want to make a
disk of add-on harmonies, you can make one and save it as MyName.HAR.
Then you could share it with other Band-in-a-Box users who could load in your
bank of harmonies (from the Har| Edit a Harmonies File…) without disrupting
their own existing default.har file.
As stated above, each .har file has 256 harmonies, so you probably need only 1
file (default.har) for all your harmonies. But if you've made a great harmony
and want to give it to your friend for example, you can export a single harmony
as a.h1 file. Your friend can then import this harmony into their .har file. Or,
you could upload some.h1 files that you've created to your favorite web site for
other Band-in-a-Box users to enjoy by importing them into their default.har
harmonies file.
The best way
to develop a harmony is to hear it as it’s playing. The preferred way to do this is
to have a song playing that has a melody in it. Any changes to the harmony will
be heard on the melody as soon as you press the [Update] button. You can also
play along as the song is playing, and hear the new harmony on the Thru
channel.
If you don't want to have a song playing, and want to hear the harmony, then set
the Test Chord to a certain chord. Then you can play on the MIDI keyboard
(with no song playing) and hear your harmony. This allows you to examine
exactly what notes BB is using to make your harmony.
Additional Harmony Settings are accessed
by pressing the MORE button, which brings up the following dialog box:
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
171
Use Close Harmony
This only applies to 2 and 3 part harmonies.
If set to =0, then it will use only close harmonies (mainly 3rds for 2 part
harmonies).
If set to =1, it will use mostly 3rds, with some 6ths for 2 part harmonies.
If set to =99, it will use mostly 6ths, with some 3rds for 2 part harmonies.
If set to =100, then it will use only wide harmonies (i.e. mainly 6th for 2 part
harmonies).
If set to between 2 and 98, it will vary between close and open harmonies (for 2
and 3 part harmonies).
Use Passing Chords (Melody)
Default = 100 %
Band-in-a-Box will sort out when to use passing harmonies, based on factors
like the duration of the note, the next note, the chord tone, the velocity, previous
notes, and other factors. You don't need to be aware of any of this. You can
visually see when the harmony is using a passing chord. The harmony display is
usually blue, but when there is a passing chord, it displays as RED.
If you don't want passing chords, set this value to = 0. We usually leave it at
100%.
Lowest Harmony Note
You can set a lowest note for the harmony to play. When the melody is low,
harmonies begin to sound “muddy,” so you can avoid the harmony being played
below a certain note.
172
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
Overall Harmony Octave
This is very useful setting. It sets the overall octave of the harmony. For
example, when we made the 5-part Trumpets harmony, we wanted the harmony
to always be played an octave higher than the recorded melody. This is because
the 5-part harmony is spread over 2 octaves and needs a high
Volume Adjust of Entire Harmony
You can set an overall adjust to the entire harmony, so it will be quieter.
No harmony if duration less than
If harmonies such as “Garner Piano” harmonize every note, they produce
unrealistic harmonies, since a piano player (like Garner) wouldn't harmonize
notes of a short duration. You can specify a harmony to only occur for notes
longer than a certain duration. In the example of Garner, we set the threshold to
200ms, notes shorter than that will not be harmonized.
OK to make new harmony with chord
This option is for how the program fixes the harmony when chord changes occur
during a sustained note harmony. Most harmonies have a feature that changes
the pitch of the harmony voices under the Melody note when the chord changes,
if the underlying voice wouldn't be a chord tone. This sounds unrealistic for
certain types of harmonies like “Garner” or “Guitar harmonies,” since it would
be unrealistic for those instruments to change the inner voicings in this manner.
If you de-select the option to “Make new harmony with new chord,” the voices
that would conflict with the new chord merely stop playing instead of changing
to new notes.
Use Guitar Harmony Voicings
This harmony type uses real guitar chord voicings that display correctly on the
guitar fretboard. Setting the “Use Guitar Harmony Voicings” checkbox means
that guitar chord voicings will be used, instead of any other voicings specified in
the Harmony Maker. Check out Harmony #32 (J Pass) for an example of this.
The Soloist Maker
This module allows you to define your own soloists. For example, let's say you
want to create a soloist in a style similar to John Coltrane, the great Jazz
saxophonist. The Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to
a soloist's playing, such as instrument range (i.e. tenor saxophone), extra legato
playing, playing more on top of the beat than most jazz musicians, and playing
straighter 8th notes than usual swing 8th notes.
In addition, you can set phrasing options, such as how long the phrase should be,
and how much “space” to leave between phrases. You can also set how
“outside” the playing should be. In the case of a John Coltrane style, you set
that to the maximum! Then “turn it loose” and hear the soloist play over any
song!
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
173
10 easy steps to make a Soloist:
1.
Bring up the Soloist window by pressing the [Solo] Button or
Shift+F4.
2.
Select a blank spot in your list of soloists and press the Soloist Maker
[Edit] button.
3.
Insert the title of your soloist and any memo note you wish to add.
(The Num field will be filled in for you.) Call this one “Bebop
Saxophone.” For the memo, you can put in information like, “Basic
bebop Sax solo, will work with most swing styles. Check “Double
Time?” if tempo is slower.”
4.
Choose the type of soloist, i.e., Swing 8th notes, Even 8th notes, Swing
16th notes, etc. This should be set to Swing 8ths.
5.
This style uses the default ST2 database, J_SWING.ST2. Another
choice could be made from the Soloists folder by clicking on the [.ST2]
button.
6.
Press the [Choose] button to select the instrument the soloist should
play (i.e. Tenor Saxophone).
Note: You may also select an instrument from the Patch Change window, but selecting an
instrument with the 'choose' button also fills in the note range information specific to that
instrument. You'll notice that the correct range for tenor saxophone has been filled in to the
Note Range settings.
7.
Modify (if required) the phrase length, space length, and outside range
parameters.
8.
Change the Legato Boost to 10 %. This will add 10% to the duration of
the notes.
9.
Increase the Lateness by -5. This will play the notes more “on the
beat” than other jazz soloists.
10. Increase the 8th Note spacing by -5. This will play the 8th notes in a
more even feel than other Jazz soloists.
If your screen looks something like the one below, press [OK]. Then, give
Band-in-a-Box a few moments to load its knowledgebase of solo ideas and new
parameters, and an additional few moments to analyze the chords. Playback will
then begin automatically. Enjoy the solo!
174
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
175
The Melodist Maker
In addition to the 50 Melodists supplied with the program, this module lets you
define or edit your own melodists. You can choose the parameters to control the
type of chords, melody and intro to be generated, as well as a number of settings
controlling song form, theme continuity, endings type, anticipations, feel, style,
harmony, soloist, patch changes and more.
Launching the Melodist Maker
The Melodist Maker is launched from the Melodist
selection dialog. Press the Melodist Maker [Edit…]
button to launch the Melodist Editor dialog.
Melodist Editor Dialog
This dialog has settings that allow you to create a Melodist.
176
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
The Num selection box allows you to select the Melodist that you'd like to edit.
The top area of the Melodist Maker screen allows you to set the Title of the
Melodist and supply a Memo.
The ST2 area allows you to select the associated ST2 database for the Melodist.
Here are some ST2 Melodist databases.
-
MEL1.ST2 (Jazz Swing, 8th notes)
-
MELPOP1.ST2 (Pop Ballads, 16th notes)
-
MELWLZ1.ST2 (Waltzes, 8th notes)
-
MELROK1.ST2 (Rock, 8th notes)
Note: Soloist databases also have extensions of ST2, but they are not compatible with
Melodists. Melodist databases can be easily identified, as they all begin with MEL.
The Patch change area of the Melodist Maker screen allows you to select a
Patch (instrument), Harmony, and Change Instrument setting (each chorus).
You can also Change Style for the Melodist, and specify the feel for the style in
the “.STY is” box.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
177
-
The Legato Boost changes the legato (length) of the notes generated.
Instruments like Saxophone have longer legato phrasing.
-
Lateness refers to how much after the beat the notes are played. This is
normally left at zero for Melodists.
-
8th note spacing is usually left at zero. If set to a non-zero value, the 8th
notes will be farther apart (units of 120ppq).
-
Increase velocity is used to increase or decrease the volume of the
Melodist.
The next section of the Melodist Maker allows you to select options that control
what type of melody will be generated. Here's an explanation of these options.
Unique Themes
178
Default=100
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
This is normally left at 100%. But if you want to force the Melodist to stick
with the same theme throughout the song, set this to a lower value (say 80%). It
shouldn't be set much lower than 80.
Unusual Placed Phrasing
Default =0
The Melodist tries to make phrases that are appropriate for the position in the
song. For example, the first 2 bars of the melody are appropriate for “opening
phrases.” But if you want to experiment with phrases that don't follow these
rules, set the Unusual Placed Phrasing to a value higher than 0% (e.g. 30%).
Simple 1st and 2nd Endings
Default=80%
This setting only applies to Melodists that are using the Jazz Swing (MEL1.ST2)
or Waltz (MELWLZ1.ST2) databases. This determines the % of time that
endings of the A sections (in AABA forms) will be simple endings (1 or 2 notes)
instead of complete phrases. Usually AABA tunes end with simple phrases at
the end of the A section, so this option is normally left at 80% or higher.
Choose Unusual Chord Progressions
Default=0
If set to a value other than zero, the Melodist will generate a typical chord
progressions. For example, instead of a Dm7 | G7 | Cmaj7, the Melodist might
generate Dm7 | Db7 | Cmaj7 Am7.
Force Long Phrases
Default=20
This determines the % of time that the Melodist will try to generate long phrases
(4 bars or more). The “downside” to setting it higher than 20 will be a loss of
uniqueness in the phrases generated. The setting shouldn't be set much higher
than 20.
Mix Minor and Major Chord Progressions
Default=0
Typical 'major key” chord progressions have progressions like (in the key of C)
Dm7 | G7 | Cmaj7, whereas in the key of Am, they would be |Bm7b5| E7 |Am6.
This setting determines how much the two types of progressions should be
mixed in a single song.
Chord Substitutions Throughout the Form
Default=0
Normally an AABA song has identical chords for each “a” section. If this
setting is greater than zero, the Melodist will generate chord substitutions
throughout the various “a” sections, while preserving the identical melodies!
Number of Variations to Choose From
Default=15
As the Melodist is determining what type of phrase to generate, it will narrow
the possibilities to the number of variations set in this variable. Setting a higher
number results in more interesting melodies, but the chord progressions are
more unusual.
Tempo Range
Default from 110 to 180 bpm
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
179
The Tempo Range setting determines the tempo range that the tune will be
created with (it will be a random tempo in the range). The auto-tempo setting
must be set on the Melodist Selection screen for the tempo range to work.
Transpose A2 Section
Default = 30
In songs with an AABA form, it is common for the second “a” section to be
transposed. For example, the first “a” section might be in the key of Eb, and the
second would be transposed up to the key of Gb. Melodists store these settings,
and some Melodists are set to transpose the A2 sections. This setting determines
the % chance that the song will be generated with a transpose. The transpose
will be usually 2, 3, or 4 semitones. The song will only be transposed if the “A2
transpose” setting isn't set to “none” on the Melodist selection screen.
Anticipations in Phrases
Default = 20
Melodic phrases often begin a little before the beat; this is referred to as an
anticipation. This setting determines what % of the phrases will be anticipated.
Since Melodists can also generate Solos, a specific Soloist can be set in this
setting. If set to “0 - no Soloist,” the program will intelligently pick a Soloist.
Melodists can be copied and pasted to quickly make new Melodists that are
variations of each other.
You can export (save) and import (load) individual melodists to/from .M1 files.
This would be useful if you wanted to send a Melodist to a friend for example.
The entire Melodist file, with 256 Melodists may be saved to a .MEL file. The
usual file is DEFAULT.MEL. The DEFAULT.MEL file is auto-saved every
time the OK button is pressed, so you don't need to explicitly save by the [Save
As] button unless you want to save alternate .MEL files and go beyond 256
Melodists.
180
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
The Guitarist Maker
The [Edit…] button in the Guitarist
Selection window launches the
Guitarist Editor, where you'll see the options for making or editing Guitarists.
-
The Guitarist is selected from the “Num” field.
-
You can title the Guitarist using the “Title” field.
-
The Memo field allows a 100-character memo about the Guitarist.
-
The Guitar Patch is selected using the Guitar Patch field.
-
Frets To Move field: If set to zero, the guitar chord solo will be limited to
chords that can be played within the current position. If set to 5 (for
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
181
example), the chords will be limited to chords that can be played within the
current position and up to 5 frets away from the current position.
-
Force Open Position forces all of the guitar voicings to the open position.
The exception is when the melody notes are so high that they can't be
played using open position voicings. If the melody is in a high range, and
you want a “forced open position,” you should likely transpose the melody
to a lower octave prior to generating the solo.
The settings for Note duration thresholds to get a chord refer to the length that a
note must be before a chord will be generated.
Looking at the settings above (for Guitarist #2), these would be interpreted as
follows:
-
If a note occurs and it is the “First Note of a New Chord,” and the note is
not followed by another note for at least 50 ticks (120 ticks = 1 quarter
note), then a chord will get voiced 90% of the time.
-
If a note occurs (not the first note of a chord), that is on “Beat 1 of a bar,”
and the note is not followed by another note for at least 50 ticks (120 ticks =
1 quarter note), then a chord will get voiced 90% of the time.
-
Similar interpretations for notes occurring on “Beat 2, 3, and 4.” You can
see that the threshold is higher for notes on beat 2 and 4, which is how a
guitar player makes chord solos.
-
“Passing notes” are defined as short duration notes that aren't on the beat,
and are followed by a note that is on the beat. In the example above,
passing notes will never be voiced as chords, since the tick threshold is set
to zero.
There is a further threshold applied to whether or not a note is voiced to a chord.
These are durations in milliseconds.
182
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
In the settings as illustrated, if the note occurs less than 100ms after the previous
note, the note will not be voiced as a chord. If the note is followed by another
note within 80ms, then the note will not be voiced as a chord.
Strumming Settings
If the Guitar Chord were all played at the same time, it would sound as if it was
“plucked.” Guitar playing is more typically a strum.
Strum Speed: If you set the Speed of the strum to, say, 80ms, then the guitar
chord will be “strummed” over a period of 80ms.
Strum Delay: If the Delay start time is left at zero, the strum will end at the
original time of the melody note. If you set it to 50% delay, the strum will be in
its midpoint at the original start time of the Melody note, and if it's set to 100%,
the strum won't start until the time of the original note. The most musical
setting is about 50% delay. A delay of 0% also sounds good, and has the added
advantage that it doesn't shift the actual time of the Melody note (relevant if you
keep regenerating the solo on the Melody track).
The [Plucked] or [Strummed] button sets these settings to preset values.
Chord Types to Include
You can decide which types of chords should be included in the chord solo:
Chord Types (Best/Good/Advanced/Unusual/Barre/Open Strings).
-
Best chords are the most commonly played chords by pro guitarists.
-
Good chords are popular alternate chords.
-
Advanced chords are chords that are difficult to play, or have
advanced voicings.
-
Unusual chords are voicings that should be avoided in most cases, but
have some uses.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
183
-
Barre chords are chords that require the index finger to be played in a
Barre position.
-
Include Open Strings can be set to Never/Sometimes/Favor. If set to
“Never,” no chords that require and open string will be played. If set to
“Favor,” it will play open strings whenever possible, and “sometimes”
is a “middle ground” setting.
Include Chords with this # of Notes. You can select the # of notes for chords
to be included in the chord solo. In the example above, chords with 2-6 notes
will be included.
Embellishment types allow setting of the types of embellishments to do,
184
“Pop” Guitarists should be set to use 9ths only. This will change C7
chords to C9 and Cm7 to Cm9.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
-
The “7ths/9ths” setting should be used for Jazz. This adds the
embellishments of C to Cmaj7 and Cm to Cm7.
-
The “7/9/11/13” embellishment should be used for “Advanced Jazz”
Guitarists and add 11ths and 13ths voicings.
If you make changes to the Guitarist settings, you need to
manually save them, by pressing [Save As], and then finding
the Band-in-a-Box folder and saving the file as default.git.
Individual Guitarists can be copied, pasted,
exported, or imported to/from disk.
Chapter 11: User Programmable Functions
185
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
MIDI File Chord Wizard
MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard
Many people who play music by ear think of songs in terms of “Chords and
Melody.” However many MIDI files lack chord symbols, so they become
difficult to learn without the user having to figure out the chords in a time
consuming process.
Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band-in-a-Box, and Band-in-a-Box will
automatically figure out the chords of the song for you. It automatically
analyzes the MIDI file, figures out where the Bass, Piano, Melody, and other
tracks are, and then figures out the chord changes for the song. The chords are
written onto the Band-in-a-Box chordsheet like any other song. This allows you
to quickly learn how to play a song from a MIDI file - just read it into Band-ina-Box and you'll see the chord symbols, and then learn the melody! You can
also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist tracks.
You can import the chords from a MIDI file. To do this, first blank the
chordsheet, by choosing File | New.
Then select the menu item File | Import Chords from MIDI File or press the
keystrokes (Ctrl+Option+I). This launches the Chord Wizard dialog.
186
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
Press the [Open (Change)…] button to select
the MIDI file that you'd like to import. If you select the “All” checkbox, then all
files will be displayed. If you deselect the “All” checkbox, then only filenames
ending with .MID will be displayed.
Note: Any Band-in-a-Box song can quickly be converted into a MIDI file by pressing
the [.MID] button, or with the keystrokes Option+S, or from the menu File | Save
Standard MIDI File. The song will be saved in the Band-in-a-Box folder with the
same file name, but the file type will be “.MID.” For example, the Band-in-a-Box song
Violet.MGU becomes the MIDI file Violet.MID.
Once you've selected the file, you can press
the [INTERPRET CHORDS NOW] button. When you do that, the chords will
be interpreted from the MIDI file, and written onto the chord sheet.
Prior to pressing the button, you might want to make some custom settings.
When you load in the MIDI file, Band-in-a-Box interprets many things from the
MIDI file for you automatically. Normally you'd want this to happen, but if for
some reason you'd prefer to make the settings yourself, you can set “Auto
Interpret settings from MIDI file” to false.
The settings that are determined automatically for you are:
-
The key signature of the song (MIDI file). Some MIDI files contain a
special event that states the key signature of the file, but most don't. For the
ones that don't, Band-in-a-Box analyzes the tracks and makes a “best guess”
at the correct key signature for the song. It usually gets it right, but if it’s
wrong, it’s likely out by a 4th or 5th interval.
-
Tempo, time signature.
-
The channels used for the Bass part, Piano (comping) parts.
-
The channels used for the Melody parts.
-
The number of bars in the song to import, including the number of leadin bars in the song.
Once you have loaded in the MIDI file, (by pressing the [Open (Change)…]
button), and assuming that you have the “Auto Interpret” set to true, you'll see
that the dialog displays the settings that the Chord Wizard has found in the MIDI
file for the key signature and channels used for the song.
Let's work with an example song called Violet Song.MID.
This should be included in your Songs folder. For this example, we're going to
interpret the chords of this MIDI file and read them into Band-in-a-Box.
-
Start with a blank chordsheet by choosing File | New.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
187
-
Choose the MIDI file Chord Wizard dialog by choosing File | Import
Chords from MIDI File.
-
Press the [Open (Change)…] button to select the
MIDI file, and then choose the file that you'd like to import. In this case it
is called “Violet Song.MID.”
Once you load in the file, you'll notice that the Chord Wizard has analyzed the
MIDI file and made these determinations for you.
It has automatically determined that the “Violet Song.MID” file
-
has 2 bars of lead-in,
-
has 103 bars of chords,
-
is
in the key of F with a 4/4 time signature, and a tempo of 120.
The Bass part is found on channel 2.
188
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
The chording (comping) parts are found on Channels 3, 6 and 7.
The Melody is found on Channel 4.
There are no other parts like the Melody that should be put on the Soloist
track.
Presets for Chord Options
Now, after loading in the MIDI files, you'd normally have a look at these
settings to see if they seem reasonable for your MIDI file. If they are not, you
can change the settings. For example, if you know that they key signature of the
song is not F but is C, then you would set that. Similarly, if you knew that the
Melody channel was on channel 3, you could set that to override the Chord
Wizard settings.
Once you’ve done that, choose one of the Presets to quickly enter the settings to
the type of song that you are trying to interpret. Preset choices are:
Jazz Standard, Jazz (Modern), Pop (with seventh chords), Pop (with no seventh
chords), Rock, Pop Ballad, Solo Piano and Solo Piano (Jazz).
Presets
Chord Options
When you choose one of these presets, it automatically makes a number of
settings in the Chord Options section of the dialog, but you can override them in
this dialog. These include,
Chord Resolution: (Range from 1 beat to 4 bars, default = 2 beats). This is the
minimum number of beats for a chord. For example, if you set it to 2 beats, then
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
189
the Chord Wizard will never attempt to come up with different chords that are
only a beat apart.
Tip: If you have a song that has a short section that does include chords every 1beat, you can redo that section of the song with a 1-beat resolution.
Include Slash Chords: If set, the Chord Wizard will include “slash chords”
like F7/A or Cm/G.
Bass Part Type: You can set this to “Root only,” “Root third and 5th,” or
“Walking bass.” If you choose “Root Only” the Chord Wizard will assume that
any bass note is the root of the chord. Choosing “Root-3-5” will cause the
Chord Wizard to assume that the bass pattern is mainly on the root-3-5 of the
chord. If you choose “Walking bass” it will assume that the bass notes can be
changing and can include many notes beside the root. Setting the “Walking
bass” line will likely result in fewer chords overall than setting the “Root only”
option.
Chords Allowed: The setting for “Allow Sus” chords determines if chords like
Csus or Bbsus7 will be included. The “Allow 7th chords” specifies if 7th chords
like C7 or Bbm7 would be allowed. Simple Rock songs might not have 7th
chords or SUS chords. Allowing chords with no thirds should be set in a hard
rock song, or similar song with “power chords” that might not contain the 3rd of
the chords.
Bass Delay: Usually a bass player plays the root of the chord at or near the time
when the chord changes. But in solo piano playing or some bass styles, the bass
doesn't state the root until later on, and this setting should be set to “delayed” in
a solo piano style of this type.
Method: You can also set the primary style of the song to Jazz or Pop using the
Lead sheet Method combo box.
Using the Chord Options Presets to make settings for Violet Song.MID.
190
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
For the song “Violet Song.MID,” we know that this is a
Jazz Swing type of song, so we press the preset called
“Jazz Standard.” By doing this, we see that the chord options have then been set
to Chord Resolution of 2 beats, no slash chords, walking bass, sus chords, 7th
chords, and Jazz lead sheet.
These settings look OK for our Jazz song; if we wanted to customize it (for
example to allow slash chords) we could do it at this point.
So, to recap, using the Chord Wizard is a 3-step process.
We loaded in the song “Violet Song.MID.”
1.
2.
3.
Pressing the preset button called “Jazz
Standard,” we then looked at the
Chord Options settings for the various channels and they looked OK so we
didn't make any changes. Then we looked at the Chord Options and they
looked OK so we didn't make any changes there.
We then press the [INTERPRET
CHORDS NOW] button – this gets
the Chord Wizard to interpret the chords and write them to the chordsheet.
Once we've pressed the [INTERPRET CHORDS NOW] button, we can see the
results by looking at the chordsheet. Here are the chords that were interpreted,
Chord Wizard results – interpreting from “Violet Song.MID.”
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
191
So that we can see how well the Chord Wizard did, we can compare it to the
“correct chords” of the song, input by a musician listening to the song. You can
see these by loading in the song “Violet Song.MGU.”
The “correct chords” for the song “Violet Song.MID.”
As you can see, by comparing the two sets of chords, the Chord Wizard got
almost all of the chords correct in this example. The Chord Wizard purposely
avoids chords like “C13,” it will put a simpler “C7” instead, since this is more
like a typical lead sheet.
If you've read in the entire MIDI file, you have 103 bars of chords on the Chord
sheet. This actually contains 3 choruses of the song. You might want to reduce
that to a single chorus, by setting the chorus end of the song to bar 36, and then
erasing the excess bars (after bar 36) by choosing Edit | Erase.
Examining the song that has been interpreted by the Chord Wizard.
You'll notice that the title (Violet Song), key (F,) and tempo (120) have been set
to the values found in the file. Part markers are not set; the Chord Wizard
doesn't try to guess where part markers might be occurring. You need to put the
part markers in yourself. You also need to choose the style to use (a Jazz Swing
style in this case). If you examine the Melody track by opening the Editable
Notation window and option clicking on some notes, or menu Windows | List
Editor Window (Ctrl+Shift+L), you'll notice that the Melody track contains
notes from Channel 4, which is what we specified in the Chord Wizard dialog.
Importing part of a MIDI file, or redoing a section of the chordsheet.
Normally we'd want to import an entire MIDI file worth of chords. But if you
only want to import some bars, you can deselect the “Import Complete Song”
192
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
checkbox, and then specify where to start in the MIDI file (i.e. “the # of lead-in
bars in MIDI file”) and what bar to start at in Band-in-a-Box (“Insert to BB
starting at bar #”) and the # of bars to import (“How many bars to import”).
For example, using the song “Violet Song.MID,” we could redo a section of the
song using different settings (for example, a chord resolution of 1 beat instead of
2 beats). If we were unhappy with the results at bar 7 and 8, we could redo this
by making the settings as follows:
Other Settings for the Chord Wizard
Band-in-a-Box and PowerTracks Pro songs contain special events that write the
exact chord names into the MIDI file. So if the Chord Wizard sees these events,
it will use them instead of interpreting the chords, since they are likely to be
completely accurate. If you'd prefer the Chord Wizard to ignore these chord
events, you set the “OK to use PG Music Chord names from MIDI file” to false.
Note: If you set this to TRUE, then the Chord Wizard won't be working – it won't be
interpreting chords since it relies instead on the chord names being present in the
MIDI file.
The setting for “Write Chord Summary Notes to Soloist Track” is only used for
diagnostic or special purposes. If set, the Soloist track will contain a special
track that has a chord written every 2 beats (or whatever the setting for chord
resolution is) that contains every note found for the chord. This shows you the
type of logic that the Chord Wizard was basing its decisions on. If you
encounter a song that gives incorrect results for the chords, you can try this
setting, and then examine the Soloist track to see the actual notes of the chords.
You can optionally include controllers, pitch bend, and patch changes from the
MIDI file.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
193
The Guitarist
Guitar Fretboard Window
This is a window for Guitar and Bass Players! The onscreen fretboard displays
any Band-in-a-Box track on Guitar or Bass. This Guitar window has features
such as auto-setting of correct positions, notes named on screen, auto-octave
adjust to play in selected position, and sizable guitar fretboard. Guitar players
will be able to “read-along” to a Melody/Solo simply by looking at the guitar
fretboard. An easy, intuitive, and fun way to learn guitar!
Launching the Guitar Window
To launch the Guitar Window, press the guitar button, or
Ctrl+Shift+G or choose the menu item Windows | Guitar Window.
Quick Tour of the Guitar Window
Once launched, you'll see the various areas of the Guitar window.
The top title bar states the key of the song is F, the Soloist track is displayed,
and the guitar is at the 5th position.
The fretboard is displayed with the highest notes of the guitar at the top, and
the open position of the guitar on the left.
There are names for the open strings displayed on the left (E B G D A E).
There are fret positions marked at the bottom of the fretboard. You can mouse
click on these positions to change the current fret position. In the diagram
above, the current position is position 5.
There are Note Names displayed. They are displayed for two positions on the
guitar fretboard. One of the positions is the scale beginning with the third of the
scale on the lowest string. In the key of F, this is the 5th position beginning on
an A note (the third of the scale). Because it begins on the third of the scale, this
position is referred to as the Phrygian Position (since an A Phrygian scale is the
same as an F scale). Similarly, the other popular scale is the scale beginning on
the 6th of the scale, in the key of F, this is up at the 10th position, and is called the
Aeolian Position.
There are note names displayed in color, with ellipses around the notes that are
in the scale. The root note of the scale is highlighted in red, the third and fifth of
the scale are in purple, and the rest of the scale tones are circled in gray.
194
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
Automatic Settings for Guitar Display
Band-in-a-Box does many things automatically on the guitar window, to insure
that the notes are displayed intelligently on a guitar fretboard. These include:
-
Automatically setting the 2 positions that will display the note names based
on the key.
-
Auto-Scanning the track to be played, and adjusting the display octave on
the guitar fretboard to insure that the best octave is picked to minimize the
number of notes that will be outside of the current position displayed on the
fretboard.
-
After Auto-scanning the track, the best position for displaying the music on
the guitar is determined. This is always one of the 2 positions (Aeolian or
Phrygian) as discussed above, though you may over-ride this by clicking on
any fret position.
-
Color coding note displays. In addition to the note names being outlined in
the colors (as discussed above), when the note is played, it is highlighted in
green if it is a scale note, and yellow if it is an out-of-scale note.
Guitar Window Toolbar
At the bottom of the Guitar Window is the toolbar
These are the Guitar Settings. See below for details.
The “Position” button. This toggles between the 2 popular
positions displayed with note names.
When you open
the Guitar Window, the first thing you'll want to do is choose the track that you
want to display. Usually this will be a Melody track or a Soloist track. In the
illustration here, the Melody track is the current track, and it has a red rectangle
around it to indicate this.
To get to the Soloist track, click on the [S] button or use the keystrokes
Ctrl+F5. Similarly, you can display other tracks like Bass, Piano, etc.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
195
The Guitar Settings Dialog
Note Display Options: If MIDI Thru is selected (Default=On), the Guitar will
display the music played on a MIDI keyboard. If Current Track is selected
(Default=On), the current track will be displayed.
The guitar will display information on channels 11 to 16 on strings 1 to 6 if
Multi-Channel Mode is set to on (default). Channel 11 is referred to as the
'base channel' (Default=11.). You can edit notes on the Notation to set the
channels of the notes. Guitar controllers will also record information in this
manner, so you can record on a MIDI guitar and see the display on the guitar
fretboard. The base channel is normally 11, but you can set it to any channel
(e.g. if set for channel 5, this would mean that channels 5 to 10 would be the
guitar channels).
196
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
The Fretboard color can be brown or black. (Default=brown)
If you elect to not display note names, you can select “Use Inlays” and a Guitar
inlay will be displayed along the neck. The inlays will only display if note
names are not being displayed.
If Send Notes to Notation Window (Default =On) is set, when you click on the
Guitar notes (and the notation window is open in editable notation mode or note
roll mode) the note will be inserted at the current time line on the notation
window.
You can set the fretboard octave. For example, if the music is very low, and
you need to boost the octave to display it on the guitar, set the guitar octave to 1
or 2. There is an auto-octave setting (discussed elsewhere). If selected, the
Guitar Octave will get set automatically.
Use Index Finger position: If set, the scale will use the “index finger” to play
notes that are one fret outside of the normal position, instead of the little finger.
Show out-of-range notes: If set, any note will be displayed on the guitar,
regardless if it is the range of the guitar or not.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
197
The note names will get displayed in up to two positions, depending on the
settings for Show Notes at Aeolian Position and Show Notes at Phrygian
Position (Default=True).
The Guitar can be sized using the Guitar Width and Guitar Height setting or the
preset buttons that set the size.
The Auto-Switch position setting allows the program to automatically switch
the display of the guitar when a new track is loaded in. This auto-chooses the
best position to display the track.
The [Set to Defaults] button sets the Guitar window to factory defaults.
Guitar Tutor
Use the new “Guitar Tutor” to analyze any song. This feature will show the
chords that are playing on the virtual guitar fretboard, in your choice of a Jazz,
Pop, or Folk perspective. The Guitar Tutor is a fun way to learn about new
guitar chords while playing along with your favorite Band-in-a-Box tune.
The Guitar Tutor is most useful on styles that aren't guitar styles. This would
apply to styles that don't have an exclamation point (!) in the file name. This is
because the guitar styles already have a guitar part that you can learn from, on
the Guitar part.
Using the Guitar Tutor, you can see (and optionally hear) guitar chords played
on the guitar fretboard. This teaches you how to play the chords on guitar.
198
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
To turn the Guitar Tutor on, launch
the Guitar window and press the [Tutor]
button.
Enable the Chord Tutor display by setting that checkbox. This will silently
display the chords on the guitar fretboard. If you would also like to hear the
notes, select the “Play chords through MIDI” checkbox.
The Tutor part uses the MIDI Thru part to
playback on. You can control volume, panning,
etc. by using the Thru settings at the top of the
main Band-in-a-Box screen. You can select the patch in the Tutor dialog.
The tutor will display Jazz, Pop, and Folk voicings in easy, medium, and
advanced forms. The advanced forms use inversions, and changing patterns of
chords, while the easy ones just stick to the common “campfire” chords.
One of the tutors uses 3-note Jazz voicings to simulate the famous Big Band
chord guitar comping styles. If you use this, you'll only see 3 notes in the chords
of course. Since it sometimes helps to see the entire 4 chord voicing, in this case
there is the option to show the muted note as well.
Note: This applies to the Guitar Tutor. There is also the option to show this for the
Guitar Styles. This option is present in the Guitar Options Dialog.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
199
The Guitar Tutor stays enabled until you change the Guitar track to another
track (for example, to change it to the Bass track). You can easily re-enable it
by clicking on the [Tutor] button again.
Using the Guitar Tutor
By enabling the Tutor, you'll see (and optionally hear) guitar chords played on
the guitar along to any song.
Load in a Jazz song and start it playing (e.g. Old Folks.MGU). You'll notice
that the associated style (GARNER.STY) doesn't have any guitar chording in it
…yet! Let's use the Guitar Tutor to show us what guitar chords to play during
this song:
To turn the Guitar Tutor on, launch
the Guitar window and press the [Tutor]
button.
Set “Enable Chord Tutor Display” and “Play Chords through MIDI.” Select the
“Walking Jazz – 4 note chords” tutor type, and press [OK].
You'll now hear and see guitar chords (and patterns of chords) played in a Jazz
style along to the song. In the example above, the chord is an Eb7 chord and the
tutor is showing a common Jazz voicing for an Eb7 chord.
Turn the tutor off by disabling the “Enable Chord Tutor Display” setting.
200
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
Chord Substitution Wizard
Reharmonizing a song with the Chord Substitution Wizard is a fun and
educational way to perform or practice a familiar song in a brand new way. This
feature is very easy to use; simply highlight an area of chords and select “Chord
Substitution.” The possible chord substitutions are instantly displayed for you.
For example, if you had chords such as “Dm7 G7 Cmaj7,” a list of substitutions
including the tritone substitution “Dm7 Db7b5 Cmaj7” would be offered to you
for use in your song. There are also helpful comments associated with each
substitution, showing you why a given substitution might work in each case
(e.g., is the melody compatible with the substitution, etc.). Or you can enable
the “Auto-Substitution“ feature and the substitutions will be selected according
to the general preset preferences.
There are 2 ways to get chord substitutions, you can let Band-in-a-Box show
you a list of possible substitutions to pick from yourself (User | Chord
Substitution Dialog), or you can let Band-in-a-Box pick them automatically
(User | Auto-Substitutions).
Chord Substitutions Dialog
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
201
The appearance of this dialog depends on what chords are present at the
highlighted bar. This bar number is shown in the dialog and may be changed.
In the example above, the chord is an F7 chord, so the substitutions shown are
for an F7 chord. The substitutions shown may work for up to 4 bars, depending
on the substitution. In the examples above, the substitutions work for 2 bars.
You can control what types of substitutions to see by using the Jazz/Pop
checkbox. Some substitutions include more chords than the original, some
simplify the progression, and these can be viewed using the checkboxes. You
can elect to exclude substitutions that have a chord on each beat.
The “Types of Substitutions to include” combo box will filter the substitutions
to include only the best substitutions or all of them.
The “reload” [Recompile] button is only used if you have edited the
chordsub.txt file to add your own substitutions.
Once you see a substitution that you like, you can enter it onto the worksheet by
pressing the [Do Substitutions now] button, or double clicking on the
substitution line. You can then move the current bar to the next part of the song
that you need a substitution for and repeat the process.
You can undo the substitution by pressing the [Restore] or [All] button.
Auto-Chord Substitution Dialog
You can quickly auto-generate substitutions for an entire song or portion of a
song using the auto-substitution dialog (accessed from the User menu). For
example, we can generate substitutions for the! Freddie.MGU song. Here is the
original chord progression.
By using the auto-substitution dialog, we can generate substitutions for the
whole song, and we get this result:
202
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
You can see that Band-in-a-Box chose the substitutions for about 70% of the
chords in the song (that's what we told it to do in the dialog). It began by
replacing the F7 chord with a Cm7 F9 progression. Some of the substitutions
chosen are more advanced than that (replacing an F7 with a B13 for example)
Here are the settings in the auto-substitution dialog that produced this result:
If you'd like Band-in-a-Box to only generate for a certain range of bars, you
should first highlight that range of bars in the chordsheet, then launch the dialog.
The Range will then be set to Part of the song and the bar # and # of bars
settings will also be set. You can override these settings with manual settings, if
necessary.
Using the Chord Substitution Wizard
Load in the song !Freddie.MGU. The tune begins with an F7 chord for 8 beats.
Let's make that part a little more interesting by trying some substitutions for that
chord.
-
First, press Shift+Return with the highlight bar on bar 1. You'll hear the
F7 chord played.
-
Then choose Edit | Chord Settings (Option+Z), and the Chord Options
dialog will be launched.
Notice the following new
buttons: Preview, Builder and
Chord Substitutions:
-
The [Preview] button allows you to hear the chord, which is similar to what
we did above by pressing Shift+Return.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
203
-
The [Builder…] button allows you to try different chords, and build up
chords by selecting root and extension.
-
The [Chord Subs…] button is the one that we're interested in this time. By
pressing this button you'll now see a dialog with substitutions selected for
the chord progression that begins with F7 for 2 bars.
There are a number of substitutions that have been identified. For example, the
first substitution replaces the two bars of F7 with a Cm7, F7 progression. The
program has also looked at the melody of this song (which contains an “a” note)
and commented in the Memo that this “a” melody note is not compatible with
the Cm7, so doesn't advise this substitution.
Choose one of the substitutions that you would like, and press the [Do
Substitutions now] button (or double click on the substitution). This will enter
the substitution to the chordsheet, and the dialog will show substitutions for that
new progression.
Press [Close] if you are happy with the substitution, or [Restore] to restore
(undo) the substitution. Press [All] to undo all of the substitutions that you have
made.
204
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
Chord Builder
The Chord Builder is launched with the menu item User | Chord Builder or with
the keystrokes Ctrl+Shift+H. Chords are previewed as they are built.
You can now click on the root of the chord (in the root group), the extension
(Maj7, etc.), and also an alternate “slash-note” root.
For example, to make the chord F9/A, you would click on the “F” root, the “9”
extension, and the Slash Root of “/A.” As you click on them, you'll hear the
bass note played on the Bass part, and the extension played on the Piano track.
If you are happy with the sound of the chord, you can press the [Enter Chord]
button. That enters the chord at the bar and beat specified.
Chapter 12: Tutors and Wizards
205
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X Tutorial
Selecting a MIDI Driver
Band-in-a-Box for OS X offers two MIDI Output options - QuickTime Music
Instruments and CoreMIDI.
QuickTime Music does not require a Mac MIDI Interface or external
synthesizer. The OS X version of QT Music, has better fidelity and lower
latency than the old Mac Classic QuickTime Music Synthesizer.
This QuickTime Music option is the simplest way to quickly make Music with
Band-in-a-Box. For best results, get the latest QuickTime download update
from www.quicktime.com.
CoreMIDI is the OS X standard MIDI driver method. CoreMIDI facilitates
communication with external MIDI devices, and it also enables inter-application
“piping” of MIDI data between MIDI applications.
206
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
CoreMIDI requires some setup, but is not terribly complicated.
CoreMIDI with a MIDI Interface and External Synthesizers
If you have not done so already, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to install
your MIDI interface. Installation details may vary, depending on the
manufacturer and the model of your MIDI Interface.
Hint: It is helpful to occasionally check your manufacturer’s web site and
download/install MIDI Interface driver updates which might become available.
Apple “Audio MIDI Setup” Application
‘Audio MIDI Setup’ is usually found in your ‘Applications’ folder. It can be
helpful to locate ‘Audio MIDI Setup’ in the Finder, then drag its icon to the
Dock, so it will be easy to launch the program (from the Dock) when necessary.
Audio MIDI Setup can also be launched from Band-in-a-Box—
Specific details of your Audio MIDI Setup screen will differ from this example,
depending on your MIDI interface and your connected external MIDI devices.
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
207
If your MIDI Interface has been properly installed, the picture of your MIDI
Interface will automatically appear in the AMS window, showing input/output
“pins” for each MIDI input and output socket on your MIDI Interface.
You need to inform Audio MIDI Setup about your external devices (keyboards,
synthesizers, drum machines, mixers, etc.). Click the [Add Device] button for
each of your external devices, and then double-click each new device to set
Manufacturer, Model, number of Send/Receive MIDI channels, and other
relevant information.
After your external devices have been created and configured, the last step is to
“wire them up” to the picture of your MIDI interface. For instance, in the above
illustration, the KX-88 keyboard controller is connected to MIDI input/output
pair #8 on the MTPII MIDI Interface. Click on an input/output “pin” on the
picture of your MIDI Interface, and drag to an output/input “pin” of the picture
of an external device.
After supplying this information, CoreMIDI will know what devices are “on the
other side” of your MIDI interface(s).
Band-in-a-Box MIDI Port Selection for External Devices
208
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
This example shows Band-in-a-Box configured to receive/record from a MIDI
keyboard on MIDI Interface Port 8. Band-in-a-Box transmits tracks on an
assortment of synthesizers, connected to various MIDI Interface ports. This
scheme would be useful on a large MIDI setup, if your best Drum sounds are on
a Port 5 synthesizer, best Piano is on a Port 2 synthesizer, etc.
Your setup does not have to be so complex. If you want all tracks to be played
on a single synthesizer (the most common situation), set the desired destination
in the Bass popup menu, and then click the ‘set all ports to this’ button, to
quickly set the destination for all tracks. You can get excellent results with all
instruments assigned to a General MIDI compatible device, such as a Roland
Sound Canvas module.
QuickTime Music and a Controller Keyboard
If you have a small MIDI controller keyboard, but you do not have any external
MIDI Synthesizers, Band-in-a-Box can easily support this.
Band-in-a-Box will receive/record from a keyboard connected to the MIDI
interface, but playback and keyboard MIDI Thru will go to the QuickTime
Music synthesizer.
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
209
Inter-Application Communication via Virtual Ports
(compatible with Jaguar and Panther)
The Band-in-a-Box Virtual Output allows MIDI Output to be “piped” into
another MIDI/Audio application.
Here is an example of controlling the Rax real time Audio Unit host (Rax can be
downloaded from http://www.grantedsw.com).
Connecting to Rax with Virtual Output
After setting Band-in-a-Box to transmit via “BIAB Virtual Output,” launch Rax
and open its Preferences dialog…
210
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
Rax will now receive MIDI from Band-in-a-Box. For testing purposes, you can
select the Apple DLS Music Device in the Rax Main Window.
Hint: The Apple DLS Music Device is an Audio Unit softsynth which has properties
very similar to the QuickTime Music Synthesizer.
Additional Music Device soft synthesizers are available from other
manufacturers. If you install additional third-party Music Device softsynths,
they should show up in the Rax track selector.
Virtual Ports can be used to “pipe” Band-in-a-Box playback into most
CoreMIDI-compatible sequencers and other MIDI software.
(Rax Program Window with the Apple DLS Music Device selected on Mixer Slot 1)
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
211
Inter-Application Communication with IAC
(Panther only)
With OS X 10.3 Panther (or later), you can also “pipe” MIDI between
applications, using an IAC bus.
Open Audio MIDI Setup, enable the IAC driver, and add one IAC port.
Hint: Some IAC versions have a bug if using more than one IAC bus.
Go to the Band-in-a-Box ‘CoreMIDI Choose Ports’ dialog, and select IAC on
all output ports.
Hint: Make sure IAC is NOT selected as the Band-in-a-Box Input source or you
can have an infinite MIDI feedback loop that can ‘hang up’ your Mac.
Launch Rax, go to its Preferences | MIDI window, and select IAC as the Input
port.
Hint: These same principles would apply for communicating with other CoreMIDI
applications via Panther IAC.
On Non-GS Synthesizers, Avoid GS Commands
GS is a Roland-authored set of SysEx commands. GS is recognized by many
(but not all) Roland synthesizers. GS is also recognized by some non-Roland
synthesizers.
In a perfect world, the worst that would happen to a non-GS synthesizer is that
the synthesizer would simply ignore GS messages (and therefore GS parameters
like Master Volume or Reverb would not work).
However, there are many synthesizers available, especially amateur-written
softsynths-- It is possible that you may find occasional devices that can get
confused and malfunction, if presented with GS messages.
In order to make sure you get the control response you expect, and avoid
possible malfunctions on some synthesizers-- Unless you know that your
synthesizer understands GS messages, make sure to specify MIDI control
messages.
212
Chapter 13: CoreMIDI and QuickTime OS X
Chapter 14: Reference
Band-in-a-Box Menu Descriptions
File Menu
New is used to blank the chordsheet and start a new song.
Open song… is used to open an existing song.
Open Filtered by Style lists only the songs in a folder with current style.
Open Song with Melody lists only the songs in a folder with melodies (*.mg?).
Open Favorite Songs opens the dialog listing the last 150 songs played.
Open Song by Title opens the Song List with the full title, file name, and style
of each song in the folder. A “Find” function allows you to search the title list
Chapter 14: Reference
213
for a word or phrase to find a title quickly. For example, type in “Old folks” and
the search will find the song title “Old Folks at Home,” as well as any other
songs with “Old folks” in the title.
Import Chords from MIDI File uses the MIDI file chord wizard to interpret
chords from any MIDI file, and also read tracks to the Melody and Soloist
tracks.
(re)-make Song Titles list makes the list of song titles for the current folder. It
can be used to update the list when new songs are added to a folder.
Save saves an existing song to the same folder with the same file name.
Save song As… saves songs using the file dialog to name the file and choose a
folder for the saved file.
Save Standard MIDI File makes a standard midi file. You can save in Type 1
(multi-tracks) or Type 0 (single track) files. Karaoke MIDI files are also
supported. See the settings in the Edit | Preferences dialog box to control how
the Melody, Solo, and Harmony are written to a MIDI file.
Save song with Patches... If you would like to save certain patches with a
song, then type in the number of the patch (instrument) that you would like.
Leave the other instruments at zero (0) for No Patch change. Remember that as with all other Band-in-a-Box functions - you use the General MIDI number
for the instrument, regardless of the synth you are using.
File utilities… opens a sub-menu of file utilities.
Open Next Song and Open Previous Song will open the next/previous
song in alphabetical order. For example, if the song loaded has a file
name of “Paul,” choosing load-next-file will find the next file in
alphabetical order after Paul; maybe it would be “Peter.” The hot keys
for this are Shift+F8 and Ctrl+Shift+F8.
Auto-rename IBM songs will rename all song files in a folder using
the song title as the name.
214
Chapter 14: Reference
Rename any Song on Disk… or Rename Current Song on disk…
allows you to rename files.
Delete a Song from Disk… deletes a song file without exiting the
program.
“Nuke it!” (delete current song from disk) deletes the current song.
Load Previous Style/Load Next Style This function, (analogous to the
Load Next Song function) loads in the previous (or next) style in
alphabetical order of the file name. To load the next style, in
alphabetical order, choose the menu item File | File Utilities | Load
Next Style, or use the hot key Command+Shift+F8
(Control+Command+Shift+F8 for the previous style).
Play Song generates an accompaniment and starts playback of the current song.
Replay Already Constructed Song plays an existing song arrangement from
the beginning without regenerating a new arrangement.
Notation Window opens the Notation.
Page Setup… takes you to the setup dialog for your printer.
Print… opens the Print Options dialog.
Lyric Window opens a lyric entry line above the Notation Toolbar where lyrics
can be typed in line by line. Use the esc key to exit from the Lyric window.
Quit exits the program entirely.
Chapter 14: Reference
215
Edit Menu
Edit | Undo and Edit | Redo allow you to undo or redo most operations.
Edit | Cut functions like a delete command. It removes bars of chords from a
song.
Edit | Copy and Edit | Paste are to copy chords from one part of the song to
another. Copying a section of chords can be done in the same manner as
copying text in a word processor.
216
Chapter 14: Reference
Copy From…To… / Copy Rests / Erase From… To…
One of the best ways to copy chords is the Copy From… To… command, or
pressing Option+C, which will launch the Copy Chords and/or Melody
dialog. The Copy Rests command will similarly bring up a dialog to allow
copying of rests. The Erase From… To… command launches the Erase Chords
and/or Melody dialog. These dialogs allow you to specify the number of bars
to copy or erase, the location to copy to, and the option to copy or erase the
Chords, Melody, and/or Soloist.
Intro Bars Auto-Generate
This command will launch the Generate Chords for Intro (or Remove Intro)
dialog where you can specify the characteristics of the intro you wish to
generate.
Clear Lead sheet blanks the chordsheet and restores the default song settings.
Insert Measure(s) inserts a certain # of bars into the chordsheet.
Delete Measure(s) removes a certain # of bars from the chordsheet.
Shrink cuts chord durations by 50% (e.g., 4beats>>2beats; 2beats>>1beat).
Expand doubles the durations of chords (e.g., 1beat>>2beats; 2beats>>4beats).
Unfold (convert to 1 BIG chorus)
Choose this command to unfold a multi-chorus song into one BIG chorus.
When selected, Band-in-a-Box will display all choruses and verses of a song
without loops or repeats. It is useful, for instance, when you have a song with 3
choruses and want to convert it to a single large chorus, or to customize a song
with the “Edit Bar Settings” feature to change meter, tempo, patches, styles,
and/or harmonies and generate a MIDI file for export.
Set Time Sig Of Scrap allows a new time signature to be selected for
highlighted bars on the chordsheet.
Blank Lyrics removes the lyrics from a song.
Preferences
This dialog box allows you to set various settings. These are all saved in the
Band-in-a-Box folder in a file named INTRFACE.BBW.
Chapter 14: Reference
217
Preferences dialog.
Boost Vel. of Pushes by
The pushes in Band-in-a-Box are the chords that get played before the
beat. Typically, pushes are played a little louder than other patterns.
You can leave this setting at 0, or set it to between 0 and 10.
Show Chords with push/rest chars
The push character is the caret symbol (^). So a C chord with a push is
displayed as
^C.
The rest character is a period (.), so
C. shows a C chord with a rest.
If you prefer not to see these characters displayed, then set this to false.
These characters won't show up on the printout regardless of this
setting.
Show Rests in color
If checked, pushes are displayed in GREEN, and rests are displayed in
RED. This only applies to the Chord Sheet (not the notation).
218
Chapter 14: Reference
Allow any Rests
You can disable the rests feature. You might want to do this if you've
got a song with a lot of rests in it, and are then having difficulty
recording a melody because you don't hear the drums providing the
beat (due to the drums resting). If so, you can temporarily disable the
rests so that you can record and listen to the drums.
Allow any Pushes
If for some reason you don't want a style or a song to have pushes, you
can uncheck this box.
Allow Style Pushes
If for some reason you don't want a style to have pushes, you can
uncheck this box.
Chord Display Type
This box allows for non-standard display of chords on the chordsheet
area. The options here allow for Normal (Standard Notation), Roman
Numeral Notation, Nashville Notation and Solfeggio Notation.
Allow Lead In Bars
People who use Band-in-a-Box for soloing practice will likely turn the
lead-in off to allow endless looping uninterrupted by the lead-in count.
Play Lead In even if Intro present.
If a song has an intro, it’s usually not necessary to play the 2 bar lead-in
count. There's a new option to always omit the lead-in if an intro is
present. If you would like the lead-in bars to be played even if an intro
is present in the song, set this feature to “On.”
Audible Lead In / Volume
Use these settings for the audible drum count-in. You can select any
drum instrument for the count-in. You can choose different count-in
rhythms (e.g. Tap on 2 and 4 instead of 1-2-3-4).
Smart Lead-ins can also be set here. A smart lead-in avoids playing
the count-in drum sound during a Melody pickup.
Metronome During Recording
Select this to hear the metronome while recording.
Allow Any Endings
Song endings can be turned off for all songs, or on a song-by-song
basis.
To turn song endings off for all songs uncheck the “Allow Any
Endings” option.
Chapter 14: Reference
219
To turn the song ending off for a single song select the Additional Song
Settings option from the Song menu and uncheck “Generate 2 Bar
Ending for This Song.”
Limit Screen size to
Use this setting to choose the size of the screen you want to display.
Menu Limit
Determines the number of items that can be listed in a menu.
OK to Load Harmony w/songs
If checked, the harmony settings for each song will be loaded and saved
with each song. If set to NO, the harmony setting won't be saved or
loaded with the songs. If you are using a certain harmony, you should
set this setting to NO, otherwise you'll have to keep re-selecting the
harmony when you load in new songs.
Change Harmony w/new chords
Example: If a harmony is played on bar 1 on a C chord, and then the
note is held as the chord changes to a Fm7 chord, (if this setting
checked) the harmony notes will change so that they will be still be
playing chord tones. If they don't the harmony sounds dissonant.
Leave this setting checked, unless you have a specific reason to disable
it. The harmony is changed by moving the voices to the nearest chord
tone.
Har. Volume Adjust
Raise or lower the overall volume of the Harmony with a range of –128
to 128.
OK to Load Style w/songs
Leave this unchecked to audition the same style with several different
songs.
Use MSB for Bank (Roland)
Band-in-a-Box sends General MIDI bank changes. These can be sent
in two ways. Most synths (e.g. Roland, Korg, Kawai) use the
Controller 0 for the bank. This is the MSB (Most Significant Byte)
method. Check this option if you are using one of these synths. Some
synths use Controller 32 for the bank (e.g. Peavey). This is the LSB
(Least Significant Byte) method. If you have one of these synths, then
uncheck the “Use MSB for Bank (Roland).”
Tip: If your synth requires both MSB and LSB bank changes, use the '+' button
(patches on higher banks).
Pause Play till MIDI (or key)
220
Chapter 14: Reference
Allows playback to be started from another keyboard or the computer
keyboard. The Band-in-a-Box arrangement will be generated, then the
program will pause until the MIDI or keystroke signal is received.
Close window when not in BB
Closes the Band-in-a-Box window when the Finder or another program
is chosen.
OMS/FreeMIDI Playback in background
(FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band-In-A-Box™ OS9,
booted from Mac Classic)
Enables OMS or FreeMIDI playback in the background.
Include Patch Changes in MIDI files
This will include the patch (instrument changes).
Include 2 bar lead-in in MIDI file
If you don't want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the
1—2—1-2-3-4 count-in you can select this option, and the MIDI file
will begin directly at bar 1 without the count-in. If there is a Melody
pickup, then the 2 bar lead-in will remain in the file.
Include Controllers (Reverb/Chorus/pan)
This will include the reverb, chorus, and panning settings.
Include Forced Channel Meta Event
This will include the forced channel META event. It is recognized by
PowerTracks Pro Audio and other PG Music programs only.
Write Chords, Part Markers META event
Writes the chords and part markers to the MIDI file.
Include Guitar Position Controller
This will insert a controller 84 which PG Music uses to indicate the fret
position. Since some synths also use this for “Portamento Control,”
you should use this setting with caution.
Write Soloist Part on channel 5
Normally the program writes the Soloist part on channel 8. Since that
could also mean the left hand of a piano track using the convention of
channel 8/9 for piano, this option allows you to write it on channel 5
instead.
Write Harmony to MIDI file
If checked, the harmony will be written to the MIDI file. If not, just the
melody will be written to the MIDI file.
MIDI file Harmony sep. tracks
Chapter 14: Reference
221
If checked, the harmony will be written to the MIDI file on separate
tracks for each voice. You could use this to print out individual parts to
your printer for example.
Write Guitar part on 6 channels
If set to YES, the styles that are Intelligent Guitar Styles will result in a
MIDI file that has the Guitar part written on 6 channels (11-16). Then,
when you read it in PowerTracks, or another sequencer that uses the
convention of 11-16 for guitar strings, the guitar part will display
correctly.
Preferences 2
Preferences 2 dialog.
222
Chapter 14: Reference
OK to save/load rev/vol/chorus w/songs
Offers global control over additional song settings (i.e. reverb, chorus,
etc.) that can be saved and/or loaded with each song.
Send GM Mode At Startup
For sound modules that are GM compatible, this command will ensure
that the module is ready to accept GM-specific MIDI data such as
Bank, Controller, and Patch information.
Send GS Mode On At Startup
For sound modules that are GS compatible, this command will ensure
that the module is ready to accept GS-specific MIDI data such as Bank,
Controller, and Patch information.
Note: Many newer modules/keyboards made by Roland and others can take
advantage of the extra parameters and features found in the GS mode. We
recommend using this mode rather than the GM mode if your synth supports it.
Similarly, many newer Yamaha modules/keyboards support the XG specification.
If your synth supports this mode, we recommend using it in order to access more
parameters and patches than the GM standard provides. Some Yamaha XG
modules/keyboards can also be set to work in GS mode, if desired.
Send XG Mode On At Startup
For sound modules that are XG compatible, this command will ensure
that the module is ready to accept XG-specific MIDI data such as Bank,
Controller, and Patch information.
Turn External Keyboard’s Local On at end of session
Normally while using Band-in-a-Box the “local-off” setting for your
MIDI keyboard is best, since the THRU part will be coming from
Band-in-a-Box and you don't want to hear your MIDI keyboard
doubling the notes that are being played. However, when you exit
Band-in-a-Box, you might want the “local on” setting for your
synthesizer turned back on. This option defaults to true.
OK to beep with messages
Now that computers have better speaker systems, a simple “beep” when
an incorrect key is pressed can seem loud enough to “wake your
neighbors.” Setting the “silent beep” option allows Band-in-a-Box to
visually flash the window title bar to get your attention, instead of
generating an audible “beep.”
OK to prompt to reduce/expand
If a style is changed with a different feel (16th notes instead of 8th
notes), Band-in-a-Box will automatically offer to expand or reduce the
duration of the chords, and change the tempo to accommodate the new
style. This also works as the song is playing.
Chapter 14: Reference
223
Lowest Bass Note (E2 = default)
Styles will normally play bass notes (down to the low E) if the pattern
won't go below a low E note. This happens with all styles
automatically, but there is also an option to set the lowest note that the
bass can go real low (so you can get a low C if you want to)!
My soundcard or MIDI doesn't have brushes – remap them
Most GM modules have brushes available on patch 41 on the drums.
On some you need to load a GS sound font for this to occur. On the
Yamaha XG, you likely need to send a “GS mode on” message from
the GM menu in Band-in-a-Box. But if your module just doesn't have
brushes available, then you can set this option, and the style will remap
the notes to different drum instruments that don't have brushes.
For Roman Numerals in minor keys, use relative major
Option for minor keys base roman numerals on the relative major.
For example in key of Am, Am is either the Im chord or the VIm
chord.
Save Button on main screen works as Save As
The [Save] button will launch the file dialog where the location and
name of the file being saved can be changed.
Name MIDI files with .MID extension
This will append the file extension .MID to MIDI files saved in Bandin-a-Box, rather than prefacing them with SMF (Standard MIDI File).
Allow larger fonts on Chord Sheet
Display larger fonts, particularly with higher screen resolution.
Color for Chordsheet Area
Make your choice from a list of colors for the chordsheet area. The
keystrokes Ctrl+Shift+C will toggle through the colors from the main
screen without opening the Preferences 2 dialog.
Soloist Prefs…
Set the “Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard” to “true” if you want
MIDI velocity information sent to the Soloing Wizard. If you have a
velocity sensitive MIDI device attached to your computer and you want
to control the dynamics of the Soloist, you should enable this feature.
Set the “Trigger Playback Early” to “true” to enable song playback to
start before the Soloist has actually completed composing a solo.
Setting this setting to “false” (disabled) will instruct Band-in-a-Box to
completely compose a solo before song playback begins.
Set the “Soloist –Prefer Long phrases” checkbox to “true” (enabled) if
you would like the Soloist to use the longest musical phrases it
224
Chapter 14: Reference
“knows.” (Note: This option may also increase Soloist creation times.
Disable this feature if you are using a slower or low-memory equipped
computer.)
The “Soloist/Melodist Velocity Adjust” box allows you to quickly
boost or reduce the volume of the Soloist or Melodist part relative to
the other instrument parts. For a realistic “mix,” they are set slightly
louder than the other instruments/parts in a song. The default is 5.
Slide Tracks
This allows you to move any of the Bass, Drums, Piano, Guitar, Strings, Melody
or Soloist tracks ahead or behind by a certain amount. You could, for example,
slide the Bass track so it plays a little ahead of the rest of the band. This has the
effect of making the bass player “drive the band,” and is useful in Jazz styles to
make the music sound more exciting.
Chord Settings
This launches the Chord Options dialog box, where you can put in rests and
pushes. You can launch the Preview, Chord Builder, or Chord Substitution
functions from this window.
Bar Settings
This command opens the Edit Bar Settings dialog where you can change meter,
tempo, patches, styles, and/or harmonies at the current bar.
Song Memo…
A song memo of up to 2000 characters may be added. When a song has a memo
associated with it, a little red square is visible around the [memo] button (located
to the right of the song title). Clicking on the [memo] button launches the Song
Memo dialog, where you can type in a short memo about the song, style, etc.
Enter Lyrics at Current Bar opens the lyric entry window for the current
location in the song.
Copy Lyrics to Clipboard puts a copy of the lyrics in the clipboard.
Move Lyrics up/down Row(s)… allows previously entered lyrics to be shifted
up or down in a range of +/- 24 rows.
Edit Chord “Shortcut.txt” will edit the file SHORTCUT.TXT using Teach
Text. This is the chord shortcuts file.
Refresh Chord Shortcuts saves changes to the SHORTCUT.TXT file.
Changes must be saved with this command or they will be lost.
Chapter 14: Reference
225
Song Menu
Title/Key/Tempo/Embel…
Opens the Main Settings dialog. This dialog offers you the option to set the
title, key, and chorus begin/end, etc. These settings are usually entered on the
main screen.
Chorus begins at …
Shows the bar number for the start of the chorus. Choose this command to set a
new beginning for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordsheet.
Chorus ends at …
Shows the current bar setting for the end of the chorus. Use this command to set
a new ending for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordsheet.
Total Choruses = …
Show the number of choruses for the song, click to change.
Vary Middle Style
If checked, the middle chorus(es) of the song will be played in the “b” substyle.
226
Chapter 14: Reference
Overall Loop
If checked the song will play again from the beginning it time it reaches the end.
Additional Song Settings
These additional song settings are saved with the song.
Vary Style in Middle Choruses
Default =
If checked, the song will play in substyle B throughout the Middle
Choruses. The Middle Choruses include all choruses except the first
and last. If not checked, the middle choruses will play “a” and “b”
substyles as set in the chordsheet with part markers.
For example, in Jazz Swing, since the B substyle is Swing, all of the
middle choruses will have swing bass. (The A substyle is playing half
Chapter 14: Reference
227
notes on the bass.)
Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses
Default =
This is used if you have put pushes into a song, but don't want the
pushes to play in the middle choruses. The middle choruses are usually
used for soloing, so you may not want the pushes to play.
Allow Rests in First Chorus
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to
play in the first chorus.
Allow Rests in Middle Choruses
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to
play in the middle choruses. The middle choruses are usually used for
soloing, so you may not want the rests to play.
Allow Rests in Last Chorus
Default =
This is used if you have put rests into a song, but don't want the rests to
play in the last chorus.
Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses
Default =
This determines whether Pedal Bass effect will be allowed in middle
choruses.
Allow Embellishment of Chords
Default =
The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords. This means that if
you type a C7 chord, the piano player may play a C13 or a C7b9. This
makes the arrangement sound more authentic.
Tip: If you are hearing flat 9 and flat 13 embellishments on a C7 chord that is
clashing with the melody, you should rename the chord C9 or C13, which will
ensure natural 9 and 13 embellishments. To disable the embellishment for a
certain song, uncheck this option. There are very few situations that you wouldn't
want it on, especially if you name some chords as C9 instead of C7 (in situations
where the melody clashes with the embellishment as discussed above.) You
would need to uncheck it for any song that you don't want it on.
Tag Settings
A tag (or coda) is a group of bars that are played in the last chorus of a
song. If you check the “Tag Exists?” field, then the tag will play
during the last chorus of the song. The tag begins after the bar you
specify as “Tag Jump After Bar #.” The song then jumps to the “Tag
Begin at Bar #” and plays until “Tag Ends After Bar #.” At the end of
the tag the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual.
228
Chapter 14: Reference
Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song
Default =
You can disable the ending for a certain song. You can disable the
endings for all songs by clearing the checkmark for the “Allow Any
Endings” setting in the Edit | Preferences menu item.
Start the 2 bar ending early
The usual Band-in-a-Box ending is 2 bars appended to the end of the
song. This option gives you an alternative to end the song on the last
bar of the song. Band-in-a-Box will still play an ending on the chord
that you specify, and the ending will occur as a 2 bar phrase beginning
2 bars before the end of the form. This results in more natural endings
for many songs.
Play
Generates a new arrangement and plays the song.
Stop
Stop playback with this command or the esc key.
Hold (Pause)
Pauses the song. Repeating this command resumes play from the exact location
where the song was paused.
Play From Bar#
Choose a chorus and bar to play from in the current arrangement. Parts are not
regenerated. Use this command during playback to jump to any bar in the song.
Play From Current
When the song is stopped this command starts playback again at the bar with the
highlight cell.
Go (Open and Play)
Launches a file dialog for selection of any song in any folder. The selected song
loads and plays automatically in Band-in-a-Box.
Juke Box Play
Opens the Juke Box Options dialog to select and play a jukebox list.
Previous Juke Song/Next Juke Song
Navigate back and forth in a jukebox set list.
Wizard Playalong
Enables the Wizard feature for play along on the computer keyboard.
Wizard Uses ‘Smart’ Notes
Toggle this on so the Wizard will only play notes based on the chord/key of the
song. Toggle smart notes “Off” (unchecked) to have the Wizard provide you
access to the chromatic scale.
Chapter 14: Reference
229
S Menu
Use this list for a quick pick from the list of 24 original Band-in-a-Box styles.
You either can pick a musical style before or after you have entered the chords
to a song. Once you load a style, the song will be played back using your
chosen style. All style files have a .STY extension.
Besides these built-in styles, there are many more styles available for use with
the Band-in-a-Box. Here are other ways to access styles.
Pressing the [.STY] button will bring up the StylePicker window
with information on all the styles found in your Band-in-a-Box
folder.
The [f] button brings up the Favorite Styles dialog where the
150 most recently used styles are listed.
230
Chapter 14: Reference
MIDI Menu
MIDI Settings
This dialog box allows you to setup settings for each part (Bass/Drums/Piano
etc.). You can also set the Harmony channels by pressing the [Harmony] button
inside this dialog box.
Chapter 14: Reference
231
Open Current OMS Studio Setup…
(FreeMIDI and OMS are supported only in Band-In-A-Box™ OS9, booted from
Mac Classic)
If using OMS this will take you to the Studio setup. This will be grayed out if
OMS is not active on your system.
OMS MIDI Setup…
Opens the OMS MIDI setup dialog, if OMS is installed. This will be grayed out
if OMS is not active on your system.
**OMS Parameters (choose ports)
Select MIDI Input and Output ports for OMS. This will be grayed out if OMS is
not active on your system.
**Select MIDI Driver or QuickTime…
Opens the MIDI Drivers dialog where you can choose from the installed
drivers.
232
Chapter 14: Reference
Make General MIDI Patch Map…
This opens the GS Patch Numbers dialog, where you can make a customized
General MIDI patch map for your non-GM instrument.
Type in the patch number that your synth uses for each instrument listed. For
example, suppose that your sound source has Acoustic Piano at patch location
41. In the General MIDI Patch Edit dialog, select the box to the left of Acoustic
Piano and type 41. Do the same for all of the instruments in the General MIDI
patch list. If your synth doesn't have an exact match, use a close sounding patch
that it does have.
Once you have made a patch map in this way, whenever Band-in-a-Box
encounters Acoustic Piano (which is General MIDI instrument #1), it will look
up this Patch Map Location and then send out Patch 41 to your synth/sound
module.
Furthermore, you will never have to refer to instruments in Band-in-a-Box by
your synth's number. Instead, you'll use the General MIDI instrument
numbering (e.g., Acoustic Piano = 1). So if you are Saving a Song with Patches
or Assigning favorite instruments or combos you will still type #1 to tell Bandin-a-Box that the patch is Acoustic Piano.
Set Favorite Patches/Combos…
For each of the 8 parts (Bass, Piano, Drums, Guitar, Strings, Melody, Soloist,
and Thru) you can assign up to 10 “favorite” instruments. Once assigned, these
instruments can be quickly and easily set.
Use General MIDI instrument numbers. If you use a custom patch map it will
handle the conversion to your synth’s non-GM patch numbers, always enter GM
patch numbers for the favorite instruments.
A Favorite Combo is a group of patch changes (1 for each part) that are sent out
as a “batch” when you send one of the combos.
Chapter 14: Reference
233
Edit Drum Kit (Note Values)…
If you have been unable to find a preset drum map that matches your synth's
drum notes, then you may need to type in the drum notes that your sound source
uses. To do this, you need to hook your MIDI controller up to play the Drum
sounds from the Keyboard.
Play up and down the keyboard to hear all the drum sounds. Locate note 36 as a
starting point.
Type the MIDI note numbers for the various instruments as you find them on
your drum machine or keyboard.
Save/Load MIDI Setup/Drum Kit…
Allows you to save different custom MIDI setups or load in preset or custom
setups.
Send Sys-Ex File… is a command that sends SysEx information to your MIDI
device.
Style Aliases
Let's say you've got a new style for jazz called “Dizzy.” You can create an alias
so that when Band-in-a-Box looks for a Jazz Swing style, it will load in “Dizzy”
instead, so you don't have to make changes to all your songs. And when you
have found a new favorite style, just change the alias. You can also load or save
sets of “Alias” files and share them with others.
To make an alias, click on the original style then select the style you would like
to load (substitute) in its place. If you want to type in a style name that you
don't have, use the Custom button.
When you have successfully made an alias, you will notice that there will be a
small arrow in the Styles box on the main screen indicating that you have an
alias loaded.
234
Chapter 14: Reference
Choose Patch from Higher Bank…
This will display a list of higher bank patches as found in *.PAT text files.
Choose a .PAT file from the Synthkits folder.
Insert Current MIDI Chord
Enters the last MIDI chord played on the MIDI controller into the current
location in the song.
Output chords to external device…
This is useful with an external arranger that can read chords in real time. Bandin-a-Box will output chords in root position on the selected channel during
playback.
Thru Transpose Settings…
Transpose the Thru part, which is the live playing on the MIDI keyboard, so you
can play any song in any key.
Filter for Recording…
Used to filter the MIDI information that is recorded to the Melody track.
Return to Factory Settings…
This will return program options to factory defaults, excluding MIDI Drivers
and patch map set in the MIDI Settings dialog.
What add-ons do I have?
Analyzes your current installation and reports which add-on Styles and Soloists
have been found.
Chapter 14: Reference
235
Hp Menu
Balloon Help is available with context appropriate help for many on-screen
items. Use the Help menu to enable the balloon help, and then you'll see balloon
help for main screen items, menu items and more.
Balloon Help is present only in Band-In-A-Box™ OS9. Band-In-A-Box™ (OS
X version) uses the new Help Tags, which give equivalent (but better)
functionality.
Overall description of program…
An introduction to Band-in-a-Box and its operation.
Version – new features!…
The new features in this version.
Setting up MIDI Drums and Synth…
Additional instructions for special setups.
Entering and Saving songs…
A quick guide to making music with Band-in-a-Box.
Playing Songs…
The different ways to plays songs in Band-in-a-Box.
Chord List…
Often there is more than one way to name a chord. This list of Valid Chords
gives the chord names recognized by Band-in-a-Box.
Keyboard Commands…
Once learned, keyboard commands are often the quickest and easiest way to
operate the program. This is a comprehensive reference list.
Miscellaneous Tips…
Check here for the latest tips at the time of this release.
Tech Support
Contact information for PG Music’s Technical Support.
Panic! All Notes Off!!
This sends a sweep of all MIDI notes “Off,” select this if you have notes that are
stuck “On.”
Visit web site www.pgmusic.com …
236
Chapter 14: Reference
Launches your Internet browser and loads the PG Music Inc. home page.
User Menu
Load Style From Disk…
Go to the file dialog and open a style from the Styles folder.
Load Favorite Styles…
Opens the favorites list of the most recent styles selections.
Save Style As…
Save a new style or and edited style, or rename an existing style.
Make A New Style (STYLE MAKER)
Launches the StyleMaker with a blank new style.
Edit Existing User Style
Launches the StyleMaker with the current style selection loaded. This allows
you to edit an existing style (*.STY) from disk. The resulting style can then be
saved with the same name or a different name.
Chapter 14: Reference
237
Current Style:
This shows the file name of the current style in use.
Style Information…
Shows a summary of information about the current style.
OK to Load Styles w/ songs
Normally this is checked so that songs load with the associated style. But let’s
say we’ve discovered a new style, and want to try it out on many different
songs. In that case, we would ensure that this item is NOT checked. Then when
a song is loaded, it will play in the new style we are trying out.
Mute Melody during middle choruses
This gives the Soloist(s) a chance to play on a given song during the middle
choruses. Toggle this option “On” if you would like the melody to be muted
during these choruses.
Kill Melody in Middle choruses
This command will permanently erase the middle choruses of the Melody.
Force song to # choruses
Toggle this option “On” if you would like a given song to have a preferred
number of choruses.
Auto-Generate Song Title
Band-in-a-Box will generate an infinite variety of titles for your songs.
‘Jazz Up’ the Chords
This will “Jazz Up” the chords by changing chords like C and Cmaj to 7th and 6th
chords. Song embellishment will be turned on for the song. Select the type of
7ths from the list box then click on the [OK – Jazz UP] button.
‘Jazz Down’ the Chords
This will “Jazz Down” the chords by changing chords with 7ths (e.g. C7) to
triads (e.g. C) and 9ths and 13ths to 7th chords. Song embellishment is turned
off. Press [OK – Jazz Down] to proceed.
Chord Substitution Dialog (choose your own)
This allows you to see a list of possible chord substitutions for the current chord
progression.
Auto-Generate Chord Substitutions…
This will automatically pick chord substitutions for all or part of the song.
Chord Builder…
Allows you to build up chords using mouse clicks. You can enter chords “by
ear” without having to know the actual chord names or any music theory. This
feature also illustrates the differences between various chord types.
238
Chapter 14: Reference
Play Current Chord
Click on any chord and use this command or press Shift+Return to instantly
hear how it sounds.
MEL Menu
Chapter 14: Reference
239
Import Melody from MIDI File… allows you to import MIDI data from a file
(*.MID) into the Melody track.
Import Melody from Clipboard… allows you to import MIDI data that has
been pasted into the clipboard (e.g., from a sequencer).
Record Melody… launches the Record Tracks dialog to record a MIDI melody.
Record Melody From Bar # lets you click on any bar to start recording there.
Step edit Notes… allows you to enter/edit a melody in step time using an event
list.
Quantize Melody… opens the Quantize dialog.
Resolution
Choose the division you would like the track quantized to. Choosing 16 will
Quantize to 16th notes.
Starting at Bar# and Chorus #
Quantization will begin at the place you select and applied for the number of
bars.
#Bars to quantize
Leave at 999 to quantize the entire track, or specify 1 or more bars.
Quantize durations %
Choose 100% if you want the notes quantized exactly to the division.
Otherwise, the notes will be moved the % toward the target quantization.
Quantize Start Times. By default, this option is set to “Yes.” If you don't
want the beginnings of the notes quantized, set it to “No.”
240
Chapter 14: Reference
Quantize Durations. This quantizes the END of the notes. By default, this is
set to “Off.”
Humanize w/ straight feel / Humanize w/ swing feel
Band-in-a-Box uses intelligent humanization routines, which can humanize a
melody from one, feel to another, from one tempo to another, and vary the
amount of swing in 8th notes (but not randomly). The results are very musical
with natural sounding MIDI melodies.
Humanize Melody…
Opens the Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog. The humanize effect is
broken down into 5 main categories: Tempo, Lateness, 8th Note Spacing,
Legato, and Feel.
Transpose Melody…
Allows you to transpose the melody track without affecting the other tracks in
the song.
Copy 1st chorus to all song
This stretches the melody track out over the entire song (i.e. first, last, and
middle choruses).
Kill entire melody
Erases the melody track and any data that was contained therein.
Kill Melody Choruses
Eliminates the Melody from the First Chorus, Middle Choruses, or Last Chorus
as selected from a list box.
Adjust Level of Melody…
Allows you to increase or decrease the volume (velocity) of the Melody track
without affecting the other tracks.
TimeShift Melody (ticks)…
Allows you to move the Melody forwards or backwards in small increments
relative to the rest of the song tracks. (Measured in ticks or parts per quarter,
PPQ.)
Insert Beats In Melody
Allows you to insert a blank beat or beats into the song relative to the current
time signature.
Delete Beats in Melody
Allows you to delete a beat or beats from the song relative to the current time
signature.
Copy to Soloist Track
Copies the entire contents of the Melody track to the Soloist Track. Useful for a
temporary holding area for your Melody or bouncing tracks.
Chapter 14: Reference
241
Move to Soloist Track
Copies the entire contents of the Melody track and erases the original data from
the Melody track, preparing it for a new track or data.
Swap Melody and Soloist Track
This performs a “double copy/move” so that the data that was in the Melody
track is transferred to the Soloist track and visa versa. This is also known as
track bouncing.
Melodist – Generate Chords and Mel launches the Melodist feature.
Melody Maker
These sub-menu items allow you to edit Melodist files using the Melody Maker.
Track Type
Normally you'd leave the track type set to Single. But you can set it to:
-
Guitar – Channels 11 to 16 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16,
TAB will show, the notation will be up an octave, and the MIDI file will
contain the channels preserved.
-
Multi – All channels are preserved and output on the channels. This would
be useful for importing an entire MIDI file, and playing it from the Melody
channel (using a silent style).
-
Piano – In this mode, channels 8 and 9 are treated as the left and right hand
of a piano part.
Note: When saving a MIDI file and the track type is Guitar, any notes on the guitar
channels (11 to 16) are preserved, so that any fret positions are preserved. (Channels 11
to 16 correspond to strings 1 to 6, so that a G5 note on Channel 11 would be shown on the
high E string at the third fret.)
Embellish Melody during playback
This toggles the Melody Embellisher feature on or off.
Embellish Melody Dialog…
The Melody Embellisher dialog opens, allowing you to customize the settings
of the Embellisher, choose an embellisher type from presets, and make a
particular Embellishment permanent.
242
Chapter 14: Reference
Convert Harmony to Melody Track
Converts a single line Melody track to include the current harmony selection.
Remove Harmony (or guitar solo) from Melody Track
Removes a harmony from a track, providing that the harmony was put there by
Band-in-a-Box in the first place using the Convert Harmony to Melody Track
command.
Generate Guitar Chord Solo…
Opens the Select Guitarist dialog for generating a guitar chord solo.
Rechannel to Guitar Display…
This takes a melody, and converts it to Guitar Channels 11 to 16. When it
encounters a chord, it will determine the fret position that it's most possible to
play that chord with. Otherwise, if it’s a single note, it will play it at the current
position at the guitar neck. If you want to convert an existing melody to a
customized Guitar part, this command is a good starting point, and you can edit
the track further to achieve a better result.
Utilities
A Utilities sub-menu has utility functions to eliminate note overlap and
transpose the Melody.
Chapter 14: Reference
243
Eliminate Note Overlap – Preserve Double Stops / Eliminate Note
Overlap – Remove Double Stops eliminates note overlap while
double stops are either preserved or eliminated.
Transpose One Octave DOWN / Transpose One Octave UP
transposes the Melody part one octave in either direction. This is often
useful if the Melody instrument has been changed. Transposing can be
done while the song plays.
SOL Menu
Generate and Play a Solo... opens the Select Soloist dialog where a preset
Soloist style can be selected or your own Soloist can be defined.
Start a Soloists File… allows you to make and edit Soloist styles saved under
the filename of your choice. See Soloist Edit dialog for additional details on
importing/exporting/saving Soloists.
Edit a Soloists File… opens a file dialog where you can select any Soloist file
(*.SOL) to edit. If you have not created any of your own Soloist files or if you
want to edit the one you are using, use the Edit Current Soloist File command.
244
Chapter 14: Reference
Band-in-a-Box comes with over 100 Soloists built-in. If you want to make your
own or modify an existing Soloist, use the Soloist Maker (edit) module. The
Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to a soloist's
playing, such as instrument range (i.e. tenor saxophone), extra legato playing,
playing more on top of the beat than most jazz musicians, and playing straighter
8th notes than usual swing 8th notes.
In addition, you can set phrasing options, such as how long the phrase should be,
and how much “space” to leave between phrases. You can also set how
“outside” the playing should be.
Edit Current Soloists file… opens the Select Soloist dialog with the currently
installed Soloists file.
Refresh Soloist allows the Soloist full access to all solo ideas contained in its
database. Use to refresh after several Soloists have been made.
OK to Load Soloists w/ song
Enable this option if you want Soloists to be automatically loaded with a song
that was saved with Soloist information.
Allow Soloist Harmony (on THRU)
Enable this option to permit the Soloist to utilize the Harmony features. This
will allow the Soloist to make a harmonized solo with the harmony of your
choice. See the Select Soloist dialog for additional details.
Edit Soloist Track is a sub-menu of editing options.
Chapter 14: Reference
245
Import Soloist from MIDI File allows you to import MIDI data from
a file (*.MID) into the Soloist track.
Import Soloist from Clipboard allows you to import MIDI data that
has been pasted into the clipboard (e.g., from a sequencer such as
PowerTracks).
Record Soloist … records a MIDI part to the Soloist track instead of
recording to the Melody track.
Record Soloist From Bar # … records at the current location of the
highlight cell.
Step edit Notes… allows you to enter/edit a solo in step time from an
event list.
Quantize Soloist opens the Quantize dialog. The Humanize feature is
an advanced version of this function.
Humanize w/ straight feel / Humanize w/ swing feel
Band-in-a-Box uses intelligent humanization routines, which can
humanize a Soloist from one feel to another, from one tempo to
another, and vary the amount of swing in 8th notes (but not randomly).
The results are very musical, with natural sounding MIDI solos.
Humanize Soloist … opens the Soloist: Quantize to New Tempo or
Feel dialog. The humanize effect is broken down into 5 main
categories: Tempo, Lateness, 8th Note Spacing, Legato, and Feel.
Transpose Soloist … allows you to transpose the Soloist track without
affecting the other tracks in the song.
Copy 1st chorus to all song stretches the Soloist track out over the
entire song (i.e. first, last, and middle choruses).
Kill entire Soloist erases the soloist track and any data that was
contained therein.
Kill Soloist Choruses eliminates the Soloist from the First Chorus,
Middle Choruses, or Last Chorus as selected from a list box.
Adjust Level of Soloist … allows you to increase or decrease the
volume (velocity) of the Soloist track without affecting the other tracks.
TimeShift Soloist Part (ticks) … allows you to move the Soloist
forward or backwards in small increments relative to the rest of the
song tracks. (Measured in ticks or parts per quarter, PPQ.)
Insert Beats in Soloist allows you to insert a blank beat or beats into
the song relative to the current time signature.
Delete Beats from Soloist allows you to delete a beat or beats from the
song relative to the current time signature.
246
Chapter 14: Reference
Copy to Melody Track copies the entire contents of the Soloist track
to the Melody Track. This is useful for a temporary holding area for
your soloist or for bouncing tracks.
Move to Melody Track copies the entire contents of the Soloist track
and erases the original data from the Soloist track, preparing it for a
new track or data.
Swap Melody and Soloist Track performs a “double copy/move” so
that the data that was in the Soloist track is transferred to the Melody
track and vice versa. This is also known as track bouncing.
Convert Harmony to Soloist Track… converts a single line Soloist
track to include the current harmony selection.
Remove Harmony (or Guit solo) from Soloist Track removes a
harmony from a track, providing that the harmony was put there by
Band-in-a-Box in the first place using the Convert Harmony to Soloist
Track command.
Generate Guitar Chord Solo opens the Guitar feature dialog for
generating a guitar chord solo.
Rechannel to Guitar Display converts channels on a track to channels
11 to 16. Channels 11 to 16 are used by Band-in-a-Box to indicate
strings 1 to 6 of a guitar. It uses the current position marker on the
guitar for this command.
Utilities
There is a Utilities sub-menu that has utility functions to eliminate note
overlap and transpose the Solo.
Eliminate Note Overlap – Preserve Double Stops / Eliminate Note
Overlap – Remove Double Stops opens a Choose Range dialog to
select the range of bars where note overlap will be eliminated while
double stops are either preserved or eliminated.
Transpose One Octave DOWN / Transpose One Octave UP
transposes the Soloist part one octave in either direction. This is often
useful if the Soloist instrument has been changed. Transposing can be
done while the song plays.
Track Type
Normally you'd leave the track type set to Single, but you can set it to:
Chapter 14: Reference
247
-
Guitar – Channels 11 to 16 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16,
TAB will show, the notation will be up an octave, and the MIDI file will
contain the channels preserved.
-
Multi – All channels are preserved and output on the channels. This would
be useful for importing an entire MIDI file, and playing it from the Melody
channel (using a silent style).
-
Piano – In this mode, channels 8 and 9 are treated as the left and right hand
of a piano part.
248
Chapter 14: Reference
GS Menu
Reset Sound Canvas to Factory… resets the module to factory settings.
Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB… sends a reset message to the Sound
Canvas and then sends the startup Band-in-a-Box patch changes.
Adjust Master Volume… sets the overall output level for Band-in-a-Box.
Reverb Type … or Chorus Type … Roland GS instruments allow different
type of reverb and chorus settings. These settings boxes allow you to make a
selection.
Assign Part/Chan/Patch/Bank… The GS Part settings are for GS compatible
synthesizers only. These synthesizers have 16 parts. The default is for part 1 to
be channel 1, part 2 channel 2 etc., but you can change a part to another channel.
Chapter 14: Reference
249
This allows you to use the same channel for 2 parts, so that you hear a layer of 2
instruments playing the same part.
Send General MIDI Mode ON sets the external module to General MIDI
mode. This command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GMspecific MIDI data such as Bank, Controller, and Patch information.
Send GS mode On Message (Roland) / Send XG Mode On (Yamaha): Since
the inception of the GM (General MIDI) standard, there have been two major
subsets/extensions of this standard - GS (Roland) and XG (Yamaha). Therefore,
in addition to the GM Mode-on menu item feature there are additional
commands to send a GS mode ON or a XG mode ON message at any time by
accessing the GS menu.
Master Volume type allows you to set whether to use “Roland GS Sysex
Messages” or “Yamaha General MIDI messages” for Master Volume controls.
Unless you have a Roland Sound Canvas synth or the Roland VSC, you should
select the Yamaha type.
Auto-Send GM mode at start sends a “General MIDI mode on” message when
the program boots up.
Auto-Send GS mode at start sends a Roland GS system on message when the
Band-in-a-Box program boots up.
Auto-Send XG mode at start sends a Yamaha XG system on message when
the Band-in-a-Box program boots up.
Use MIDI messages instead of GS / XG Sysex should be set by all users
except if you have a Roland GS synth (i.e., Roland Sound Canvas) or Roland
VSC. If set, the Combo settings will allow Master Volume etc to work.
250
Chapter 14: Reference
Har Menu
Melody Harmony…
Shows the current Melody harmony selection. Click to open the Select Melody
Harmony dialog.
Thru Harmony…
Shows the current Thru harmony selection. Click to open the Select Thru
Harmony dialog.
Favorite Melody Harmonies…
This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles (based on recent usage)
and allows you to choose one to use on the Melody track.
Favorite Thru Harmonies…
This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles (based on recent usage)
and allows you to choose one to use on the Thru track.
Start a New Harmonies File… allows you to make and edit Harmony styles
saved under the filename of your choice.
Chapter 14: Reference
251
Edit a Harmonies File… allows you to edit a Harmony file that is in your \bb
directory.
Edit Current Harmonies File… allows you to edit the Harmony file that is
currently loaded on your system.
OK to Load Harm. w/ songs
Toggle this option “On” if you want to load any harmony settings that were
saved/embedded in a given song.
Save Harmony with this song
Toggle this option “On” to allow Band-in-a-Box to embed the harmony settings
for the currently open song so that they may be recalled automatically later.
Change Harmony with new chord
Toggle this option “On” to allow the program to vary the harmony
characteristics (i.e. inversions) each time a new chord is encountered in the
song.
Allow Melody Harmony
Toggle this option “On” to allow the Melody MIDI channels to utilize the
harmony features.
Allow Thru Harmony
Toggle this option “On” to allow the Thru MIDI channels to utilize the harmony
features.
Allow Soloist Harmony (on THRU)
Toggle this option “On” to allow the Thru MIDI channels to utilize the harmony
features for the Soloist track.
Convert Harmony to Melody Track…
This converts a single line Melody track to include the current harmony
selection.
Convert Harmony to Soloist Track…
This converts a single line Soloist track to include the current harmony selection
(On the Thru harmony).
Use Passing harmonies for THRU
When you play along on a MIDI keyboard (or the wizard), and use a Thru
harmony, you can use passing harmonies. For example, on a C7 chord, with an
Ab note, the harmony might be a B diminished chord, which is a passing
harmony.
252
Chapter 14: Reference
Windows Menu
Notation Window toggles between the notation and the chordsheet views.
Drum Window launches the animated Drum Kit.
Guitar Window launches the on-screen Guitar fretboard.
List Editor Window launches the List Edit utility for editing MIDI events.
(The Event List Editor is not present in the OS X version, though it should get
added in the future.)
Switch to Next Track / Switch to Previous Track selects parts in the row of
Notation buttons.
Sound Canvas Editor… launches the built-in SC-Pro Sound Canvas Editor for
the Roland Sound Canvas.
(SC-Pro is not present in the OS X version.)
Guitar Tuner… opens the built-in Guitar Tuner utility program.
(The Tuner is not present in the OS X version, though it should get added in the
future.)
QuickTime/ Audio Mixer gives easy access to the system volume controls.
Chapter 14: Reference
253
Keystroke Commands – “Hot Keys”
It's often faster to use keystrokes instead of picking up the mouse. We've added
many keystroke “hot keys” to mute instruments or to adjust volume, panning,
reverb, chorus, or bank of instrument without using the mouse.
Keystroke List
This is a list of keystroke “hot keys.” These keys are also listed on the pull
down menus beside the function.
Playing a Song
A
Set the First bar of the Chorus
B
Copy to the Scrap
C
Delete the Highlighted Chord Area
D
Set the Last (Ending) bar of the Chorus
E
Display and edit Favorite Patches Dialog
F
Display and edit General MIDI Patch Map
G
Melody Harmony
H
Insert x bars in the highlighted chord area
I
Erase (Kill) entire Melody
K
Set the number of choruses in a song
L
Display and edit the MIDI Settings
M
Erase current song (New)
N
Open song from disk
O
Print current song
P
Quit the program
Q
Replay already constructed song
R
Save already open song to disk
S
Thru Harmony
T
Edit the current user style
U
Paste the scrap contents at current position
V
Set the number of lead in bars
W
Cut bars to the scrap
X
Load a “SETUP.DK” file from disk
Y
Additional Hot Keys
Press [=] 4 times to set tempo and play a song.
254
Chapter 14: Reference
[=]
Press [+] to just set the tempo.
[+]
Records a melody to the currently loaded song.
r
Plays the song from the current cursor position.
x
Enters lyrics in the Lyrics window.
l
Moves the cursor to the right.
tab
Moves the cursor to the left.
Shift+Tab
Help
F1, Shift+1, Ctrl+F1
Save song
F2
Save song with patches
+F2
Load song
F3
Load favorite song
Shift+F3
Load songs with melodies
+F3
Play song
F4
Select Soloist
Shift+F4
Quit + end program
+F4
Edit current bar options
F5
Melodist Generate Chords/Melody
Shift+F5
Save MIDI file
F6
Open filtered by style
F7
Refresh Soloist
Shift+F7
Jukebox start/stop
F8
Load next song
Shift+8
Choose a user style
F9
Choose a favorite style
Shift+F9
Edit user style
+F9
Allow Melody harmony
F10
Select Melody harmony
Shift+F10
Allow Thru harmony
F11
Select Thru harmony
Shift+F11
Panic – all notes off
F12
Direction
Arrows
Move the cursor in the appropriate direction.
[ ]
Adjust the tempo by increments of 5.
Chapter 14: Reference
255
< >
Advance page # in either direction.
l
Displays the Lyric Mode. Hit ESC or '=' to exit.
p
Set/Advance Part Marker at cursor location.
During Playback
delete
Pauses Song / Resumes Playing Song.
[+] or [=]
Increments Patch number by +1.
[+]
Decrements Patch number by +1.
shift [+]
Increments Patch number by +5.
shift [+]
Decrements Patch number by +5.
0+9
Select Favorite Instruments/Combos
esc
Stops Song
Ctrl+
+1
Transposes Melody down 1 octave
Muting Parts
You can also Mute a Part by Option-Clicking its button at the top-left of the
Main Window.
2
Mutes the Combo (all the instruments)
3
Mutes the Bass
4
Mutes the Piano
5
Mutes the Drums
6
Mutes the Guitar
8
Mutes the Strings
9
Mutes the Melody
0
Mutes the THRU
Selecting Parts
Ctrl+2
Selects the Combo
Hold down Ctrl+Shift and the letter to change the value for the selected part:
E,R
Decrease/Increase Reverb
T,Y
Decrease/Increase Chorus
U,I
Decrease/Increase Panning
O,P
Decrease/Increase Bank
Q,W
Decrease/Increase Volume
Holding down Ctrl+Shift and 1+9 and 0 keys (on top row of keyboard) selects
favorite instrument patch.
256
Chapter 14: Reference
Hold down Ctrl+Shift and [+] and [=] keys to decrease /increase patch by 1.
For example, let's change the Piano part to Rhodes Piano using keystrokes.
1.
Press Ctrl+4 to select the Piano part.
2.
Press Ctrl+Shift+2 to select the Favorite #2. That is Rhodes Piano.
Chapter 14: Reference
257
PG Music Inc.
Band-in-a-Box
®
is protected by copyright and is the property of PG Music Inc.
Copyright © 1989-2004 PG Music Inc.
All rights reserved.
PG MUSIC INC.
29 Cadillac Avenue
Victoria, BC V8Z 1T3
Canada
World Wide Web: www.pgmusic.com
E-mail: [email protected]
Phone: toll free in the United States and Canada
1-800-268-6272, 1-888-PG-MUSIC (1-800-746-8742)
Or 1-250-475-2874 (tolls apply)
Universal International Freephone Service:
Outside of the United States and Canada (where available).
+ 800-4PGMUSIC (+ 800-4746-8742)
Fax: toll free in the United States and Canada
1-888-475-1444,
or 1-250-475-2937 (tolls apply)
Technical Support:
Phone: toll free in the United States and Canada
1-866-9TECHPG (1-866-983-2474)
Or 1-250-475-2708 (tolls apply)
E-mail: [email protected]
Live Internet Chat: www.pgmusic.com
Be sure to visit the FAQ pages at www.pgmusic.com for information about known
troubleshooting issues as well as the latest technical support bulletins.
258
PG Music Inc.
Index
dialog
! 166, 198
67
chord options
2 bar ending
67, 203
early
55
Chord Preview
generate
55
chord progression
202
66
32-bit engine
14
chord root
205
A2 Transpose
110
chord shorcuts
accidentals
101
Chord Subs button
204
Chord Substitution Wizard
201
85
alias substitutions
72
alternate root
67
anticipations
136
Apple Audio MIDI Setup
207
chord substitutions
20
range of bars
203
undo
202
Audio memos
Auto-Chord Substitution dialog 202
settings
auto-substitution
201
comments
201
201, 203
Chord Substitutions Dialog
203
201
Band-in-a-Box
guitar chord solo
auto-substitution
120
202
types
202
chord tones
101
Chord tutor
199
Chord Wizard
10, 33, 68, 186
bar settings
37
Bar/Beat settings
68
chord options
189
bass 5ths
18
dialog
186
summary
193
Bass part type
build chords
Builder button
190
Chords
67
204
Copy and Paste
61
Typing in -how to
55
Carbonized
14
change patches
27
chordsheet
203
change style
65
Chordsheet
48
chord entry
48
87
color
83
Chase volumes
18
font size
83
chord
66
Channels
Setting
chorus
unfolding
outputting to external device 90
Chord Builder
Clipboard
9, 66, 205
Index
84
129
259
comping
Concert Pitch adjust
See
favorite songs
47
88
favorite styles
47, 70
From button
73
22
GarageBand
6
35
GM menu
21
Copyright
258
grace notes
136
CoreMIDI
206
Guitar
Configuration files
new
copy chords
57
display settings
195
pgshortc.txt
57
launching
194
shortcut.txt
57
Toolbar
195
window
194
custom chord shortcuts
customize
patches
Guitar Chord Solo
45
about
De-Strauss
convert 3/4 to 4/4
120
123
Guitar enhancements
17
89
fret position
243
doubled notes
136
Guitar fretboard
194
Drum count-in
19
Digitech Vocalist
Drum Kit Window
Guitar position controller
Guitar Styles
139
80
166
guitar channels
166
140
information
166
139
inversions
166
Computer 'QWERTY' Keys 141
patterns
166
Multi-Note Instruments
141
tracks
166
Sizing Window
142
voicings
166
Transport Controls
142
Guitar Tutor
198
Drum window
enhancements
Drums
editable notation
30
chord tutor
199
Embellisher checkbox
48
fretboard
198
Embellishment
Guitarist
54, 228
120, 194
Endings
55
chord solo
120
Expand
84
generate chord solo
121
redo
124
save solo
124
extension
extra notes
67, 68, 205
137
favorite combos
43
Select Guitarist
121
favorite instruments
43
settings
121
260
Index
181
interpret chords
chord embellishments
184
auto interpret
187
chord types
183
custom settings
187
Guitarist Maker
181
Intros
52
28
Jaguar
6, 210
Guitarist Editor
harmonize melody
Harmony
Jazz down chords
70
changing
66
Jazz up chords
70
low root
16
jukebox
31
setting channels
89
Jukebox
91
47
JukeBox
24, 90
Harmony area
Harmony Enhancements
103
convert harmony to notation 103
remove
Hold button
91
Options
91
key
103
13, 34
Kill Intro
112
23
Kill Melodist
112
73
Kill Soloist
112
Hints
configuration
Hide Titles
License
Hot Keys
2
new
21
loading
on menus
22
songs
47
How to register
267
styles
47, 70
humanize
136
loading songs
local off
Humanize
131
Local OFF
IAC
210
Local On
IAC port
212
melody and solo
automatic
10
82, 223
21
82
Local ON
21
part file
192
Looping
94
redo section
192
lyrics
39
import chords
import MIDI chords
instrument panel
33, 68, 186
Main screen
9
synth window
42
40
intelligent guitar parts
166
Main Screen
intelligent guitar style
167
chordsheet
40
status bar
40
title window
40
Inter-Application Communication
210
Index
261
toolbar
Choose Unusual Chord
Progressions
40
Melodies
Recording
Melodist
179
Chord Substitutions Throughout
the Form
179
125
32
Dialog
176
Force Long Phrases
179
64 bar form
110
A2 Transpose
110
Allow Style Changes
109
Mix Minor and Major Chord
Progressions
179
Auto-Tempo
110
Number of Variations
Auto-Titles
109
Simple 1 and 2 endings
179
Defaults
110
Tempo Range
179
Favorites
113
Transpose A2 Section
180
Form
110
Unique Themes
178
Unusual Placed Phrasing
179
st
Generate Less than a Complete
Song
114
Melody
Generating Complete Songs 113
Go To #
112
Insert Bass Pedals
109
JukeBox
114
Kill Intro
112
Kill Melody
112
Kill Soloist
112
Memo
112
Minor Key %
111
Number of Choruses
110
Preset Buttons
110
Replace Thru Form
112
Selection Dialog
107
Solo in Middle Choruses
109
Tempo
110
Using
113
Write To Track
113
Step Edit
Melody Embellisher
Melodist Maker
Anticipations in Phrases
180
Index
127
48, 132
advanced settings
138
anticipations
136
auto embellish
134
button
133
checkbox
133
dialog
133
doubled notes
136
extra notes
137
grace notes
136
humanize
136
memo
134
octave
136
presets
134
settings
133, 135
turns
137
vibrato
137
Melody track
130
memo
262
179
nd
84
odd-time signature support
MIDI
previous style
Channels
Setting
drivers
14
18, 215
87
Soloist note density option
20
86
Sololists increased
15
video memo support
20
Files
129
new song
34
Note Offs
88
notation
29
settings
86
note colors
87
setup
85
Note Offs
88
sync
87
octave
Standard
MIDI chord entry
9
MIDI file
87
odd-time signatures
14
choose tracks
76
omit lead-in
options
76
opening styles
Save
76
OS X
MIDI File Chord Interpretation
Wizard
33, 186
136
Octaves
78, 219
11
6
Jaguar
6
Panther
6
MIDI Thru
199
output chords
89
MIDI tracks
76
Pan
87
Mono
20
panning
130
mute tracks
76
Panther
6, 210, 212
Nashville Solos
130
New features
parameters
131
song
76
audio memo support
20
part settings
42
bass 5ths
18
Part settings
74
Carbonized engine
14
paste chords
chase volumes
18
patch changes
configuration files
22
Patches
convert 3/4 to 4/4
17
Allowing
87
drum count-in
19
Change at Bar
66
GM menu updates
21
fill
75
hot keys
21
higher banks
45
mono/stereo option
20
saving with songs
74
searching
27
next style
18, 215
Index
35
130
263
patches popup
settings
42
soloist
Pause
song
116
76
till key
80
pause song
73
shortcut.txt
85
PG Music chords
69
Shrink
84
piano display
87
slash-note
play
13
Slide tracks
84
play along
26
Smart Notes
44
Play button
72
solo around melody
play from
73
Soloist
play from any bar
73
playing songs
plug-ins
25, 72
118
10 steps
174
custom solo
119
demo
41
68, 205
91
possible substitutions
204
harmony
116
PowerTracks Pro
167
note density
Preview button
203
phrasing
173
preview chords
67
selecting
116
23
20
slash chords
120
QuickTime
206
style
116
Rax
210
technical notes
117
using
117
Program hints
read in chords
69
record melody
28, 38
wizard
44
Recording
125
Wizard
116
ReFresh Soloist
118
Registration Form
267
re-harmonizing
Soloists
number increased
201
solos
replay
73
Song
Replay button
73
entering chords
Roland RA
89
save settings
root
67, 205
8
76
55
song list
26
84
76
select MIDI file
187
song memo
Select Ports/Instruments
210
Songs
sequencers
166
Embelleshment
Index
28
song endings option
Save MIDI file
264
15
228
Embellishment
54
Alternate notes
154
framing
13
Entering Notes
154
Intros
52
Late Triplets
156
loading
10
Making Patterns
152
Screen
153
Patches
Allowing
87
Tempo Changes
153
save options
74
Timebase
153
saving
74
Substyles
Changing
63
Tempo
Change at bar
Editing existing styles
148
Embellish Patterns
162
Half Octave Range
158, 161
Importing Patterns
165
Interval to Next Chord 158, 162
66
spacing
132
Macro Notes (Bass)
159
standard MIDI file
117
Macro Notes (Piano)
162
standard notation
30
Making new styles
152
Overview
144
164
status
bar
41
Patch Changes
step enter
30
Pattern
Stereo
20
Stop button
73
stopping songs
73
Erasing
148
STY button
65
Lengths
147
Weight of 9
150
Patterns
Piano,Guitar,Strings
Style
159
Changing
11
Playback Bar Mask155, 158, 161
Loading
11
Playback Beat Mask
Style Change
65
Pushed Patterns
159
Pushing Patterns
164
Relative Weight
155, 157, 160
StyleMaker
Bass
161
156
Roman Numeral Mask 158, 161
Beat Mask
158
Selecting a Style to Edit
149
Chord playback
163
Time Signatures
148
Transpose Down Limits
162
Voice Leading
163
Riff based
163
Making Patterns
Chord Type
Drum Fill On Substyle
158, 161
156
Drums
Index
265
Smooth
StylePicker
Trademarks
163
11, 26, 35
filter
19
load previous
Selecting
Styles Set #38 About Time
substitutions
tempo
Text hints
third party styles
Ticks
206
84
70
vibrato
137
19
Video memos
20
Virtual Ports
210
24
Rax
202
voicings
210
167, 199
Volume
63
13, 37
66
Allowing Changes
87
Changes
74
window title
41
Wizard
43
23
instrument
44
19
playing
44
recording
44
smart notes
44
130
Title window
47
Tool Bar
45
track type
130
266
137
Unfold
Tempo
Change at bar
turns
18, 215
SubStyles
Changing
201
CoreMIDI and QuickTime
11
Styles list
bbm.lst
tritone substitution
Tutorial
Styles
about
2
Wizard play along
Index
28
Registration Form
Please register your program. Registering your PG Music software entitles you
to free, unlimited technical support, advance notice of product upgrades, and
news about new product releases. If you haven't registered your PG Music
software yet, please take a few moments and do so now.
How to Register
Mail to PG Music Inc., 29 Cadillac Avenue, Victoria, BC V8Z 1T3, Canada
Fax to 1-250-475-2937 or toll-free to 1-877-475-1444.
On-line at www.pgmusic.com
Telephone 1-250-475-2874, toll-free in North America at 1-800-268-6272, or
+ 800-4746-8742 where Universal International Freephone Service is available.
Name ___________________________________________________________
Address _________________________________________________________
City_____________________________________________________________
State/Province ____________________________________________________
Zip/Postal Code___________________________________________________
Country__________________________________________________________
Telephone number__________________ Fax number_____________________
E-mail address____________________________________________________
Computer (check):
IBM
MAC
Model_______________________
Operating system (e.g. Windows 9x, XP; Macintosh OS X)_________________
What MIDI interface are you using? ___________________________________
What primary synth/sound card do you use? ____________________________
Favorite Styles: Jazz ___ Rock ___ Pop ___ Country ___ Other _____________
Purchased from ___________________________________________________
Date of purchase __________________________________________________
Comments/Suggestions_____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Registration Form
267
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement